Master of Business Economics (Leuven)
CQ Master of Business Economics (Leuven)
Opleiding
What can you find on this webpage?
Our (future) students can find the official study programme and other useful info here.
You can find information about admission requirements, further studies and more practical info such as ECTS sheets, or a weekly timetable of the current academic year.
Are you a future student?
Be sure to first take a look at the page about the Master of Business Economics
There you can find more info on:
- What’s the programme about?
- Starting profile
- Admission and application
- Future possibilities
- Why KU Leuven
- Contact
- ...
Profiel
Toelatingsvoorwaarden
Master of Business Economics (Leuven)onderwijsaanbod.kuleuven.be/2024/opleidingen/e/SC_51017073.htm#activetab=voorwaardenDoelstellingen
The programme Master of Business Economics expects students to acquire certain knowledge, skills and attitudes and therefore formulates the following programme-specific learning outcomes:1. Economic analysis
The graduate uses the economic framework as a background when analysing and solving business-economic problems.
2. Management of business domains
The graduate solves business-economic problems - specific to the specialisation - based on advanced knowledge of and insight into the concepts, principles and argumentation methods, while considering the business context.
Based on their expertise and specialist knowledge and insight, and based on the familiarity with the general business operation, processes and strategy, the graduate gives well-founded advice in response to questions, paying specific critical attention to the broad framework of business, the environmental factors and the relevant public stakeholders.
The graduate detects and monitors important evolutions and innovations within the specialisation, and assesses whether these are relevant for the specific business context.
3. Design of business processes
The graduate plans, organises and evaluates business processes specific to the specialisation, taking into account the specific business context.
4. Research skills
The graduate can go through the different stages of research to analyse business problems, to formulate and evaluate solutions and to communicate about this.
5. Behavioural and social sciences
The graduate has extensive knowledge of and insight into related human sciences and can use them purposefully in the analysis of business economic problems and in assessing the consequences of these problems for society.
6. International orientation
The graduate is able to analyse business-economic questions in an international framework.
7. Entrepreneurship & innovation
The graduate has the necessary knowledge, skills and attitudes in order to develop innovative ideas in a business and/or socio-economic context.
8. Languages
The graduate communicates in a professional and scientifically correct, fluent and clear manner, both in writing and orally, in the language of instruction, and in at least one other language in case the language of instruction is not English.
9. Professional skills and preparation for the labour market
The graduate develops professional skills in preparation for the transition to the labour market (leadership skills, teamwork, communication skills...)
10. Ethics, responsibility and sustainability
The graduate recognises and critically reflects on the social, ethical and environmental aspects of business operations.
The Faculty of Economics and Business Administration encourages and pursues developmental aspects in all its courses in the field of:
Professional skills and employability
- The student develops a professional attitude as well as professional and academic skills that enable him/her to deliver a meaningful contribution to society.
- The student actively searches for settings to broaden and/or deepen his/her competences in accordance with his/her disciplinary future self.
- The student acknowledges the importance of continuing education and shows willingness to participate in lifelong learning.
Ethics, responsibility and sustainability
- In his/her thinking and acting the student shows attention for the environment, man, and society and develops a critical attitude towards these topics.
- The student adopts an ethical approach when solving problems in a business context.
International orientation
- The student pays attention to international and intercultural dimensions of business and policy.
- The student acknowledges the added value of an international context for their own environment and the society in general.
Entrepreneurship and innovation
- The student develops a proactive stance and entrepreneurial attitude, characterised by creativity and a sense of innovation.
When, within a programme, a developmental objective also constitutes a learning outcome, this is also mentioned within the objectives of the programme or the course and becomes binding.
Loopbaan
Contact
Educational quality of the study programme
Here you can find an overview of the results of the COBRA internal quality assurance method.Educational quality at study programme level
BlueprintBlueprint_BA_MA_Business Economics.pdf
COBRA 2019-2023
COBRA report_Master_Business Economics.pdf
Educational quality at university level
- Consult the documents on educational quality available at university level.
More information?
- More information on the educational quality at KU Leuven
- More information on the available documents
SC Master of Business Economics (Leuven)
programma
Students follow the core course (6 ECTS), choose one major in which they select courses for 24 ECTS and the Master's thesis (15 ECTS), one minor in which they select courses for 12 ECTS and one free elective (minimum 3 ECTS).
Students can only select the Master's Thesis in their ISP if they select it simultaneously with the core course (6 ECTS) and the courses of their major (24 ECTS) or if they have already passed these courses.
Students are free to select the major and minor they want but are advised to make sure they have the necessary prior knowledge for their chosen major and minor.
Students who obtained their bachelor's degree (at another educational institution) must always take at least 60 credits within the master's programme. It is not possible to reduce the study duration by means of exemptions based on credits obtained in the preceding Bachelor's programme. If necessary, the ISP must be supplemented with elective courses.
Students can find additional details about their study programme (the course options, the transitional provisions, information on transferring and redirecting) on the specific information page.
Core
Students are required to take the core course.Strategic Management (6 sp.) D0R04A Strategic Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R04a Cassiman
Majors
Students choose one major. Students select the major specific Master Thesis OPO, the major’s compulsory courses and they complete their major by selecting electives (if applicable), for a total of 15 ECTS (thesis) + 24 ECTS (courses).Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation
Students are required to take the Master's thesis and select four courses (24 ECTS) out of electives.
With a view to an efficient time schedule the following courses are, for students who follow a model route, best to be combined with the core course of the programme: ‘D0M19B International Business Strategy’, ‘D0R23A Political Business Strategy’, ‘D0R43A Competitive Analysis and Strategy’ and ‘D0H36A Innovation Management and Strategy’.Master's Thesis International Business, Strategy and Innovation (15 sp.) D0O48A Master's Thesis International Business, Strategy and Innovation (15 sp.) 0u. D0O48a N. Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation: Electives
International Management (6 sp.) D0M23B International Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0M23a Alekseeva Innovation Management and Strategy (6 sp.) D0H36A Innovation Management and Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0H36a Van Looy Political Business Strategy (6 sp.) D0R23A Political Business Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0R23a Crombez International Business Strategy (6 sp.) D0M19B International Business Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0M19a Slangen Economics of Global Innovation (6 sp.) D0R22A Economics of Global Innovation (6 sp.) 39u. D0R22a Veugelers Competitive Analysis and Strategy (6 sp.) D0R43A Competitive Analysis and Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0R43a Belderbos
Major 2: Entrepreneurship
Students are required to take the Master's thesis (15 ECTS) and the courses (24 ECTS).Master's Thesis Entrepreneurship (15 sp.) D0O49A Master's Thesis Entrepreneurship (15 sp.) 0u. D0O49a N. The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (6 sp.) D0O40A The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (6 sp.) 39u. D0O40a Mödl Organising for Entrepreneurship (3 sp.) D0O45A Organising for Entrepreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O45a Bruneel Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) D0O43A Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) 18u. D0O43a Leten Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) D0O44A Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O44a Leten Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) 18u. D0O46a Mariathasan Entrepreneurship and New Business Development (6 sp.) D0O37A Entrepreneurship: Models and Ingredients (2 sp.) 36u. D0O39a Debrulle Entrepreneurship: Development of a Business Plan (4 sp.) 18u. D0O64a Debrulle
Major 3: Financial Economics
Students are required to take the Master's thesis (15 ECTS) and the courses (24 ECTS).
Students who selected or already followed the course 'D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance' cannot take the course 'D0O54A Business Finance', and vice versa.Master's Thesis Financial Economics (15 sp.) D0O34A Master's Thesis Financial Economics (15 sp.) 0u. D0O34a N. Macro-Finance (6 sp.) D0C15A Macro-Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0C15a Dewachter Investments (6 sp.) D0M32B Investments (6 sp.) 39u. D0M32a Smedts Behavioural Finance (6 sp.) D0O82A R.Goncharenko (coördinator) Behavioural Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0O82a Goncharenko, Thewissen Business Finance (6 sp.) D0O54A Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) 18u. D0O46a Mariathasan Financing Mature Firms (3 sp.) 21u. D0O54a Mariathasan
Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management
Students are required to take the master's thesis (15 ECTS) and select 12 ECTS from the group 'Electives Accounting' and 12 ECTS from the group 'Electives Financial Management'.Master's Thesis Accounting and Financial Management (MBE) (15 sp.) D0O69A Master’s Thesis Accounting and Financial Management (MBE) (15 sp.) 0u. D0O69a N. Major 4 Accounting and Financial Manangement: Electives Accounting
Students select 12 ECTS from the group 'Electives Accounting'. Students who have already completed both 'D0R50A International Accounting' and 'D0T28A Consolidatie en financiële bedrijfsdoorlichting' (credit or tolerance) may not take 'D0O86A International and Group Accounting'International and Group Accounting (6 sp.) D0O86A International and Group Accounting (6 sp.) 39u. D0O86a Simac, Dekeyser (plaatsvervanger), Neijens (plaatsvervanger) Introduction to Auditing and International Auditing Standards (6 sp.) D0N77A M.Willekens (coördinator) International Auditing Standards (3 sp.) 26u. D0N76a N., Helsen (plaatsvervanger) Introduction to Auditing (3 sp.) 26u. D0R92a Willekens, Sufaj (plaatsvervanger) Management Control and Cost Management (6 sp.) D0O58A Management Control and Cost Management (6 sp.) 52u. D0O58a N.
Major 4 Accounting and Financial Management: Electives Financial Management
Students select 12 ECTS from the group 'Electives Financial Management'.Strategic Financial Management (6 sp.) D0R05A Strategic Financial Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R05a Mulier Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (6 sp.) D0R87A Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (6 sp.) 39u. D0R87a Verriest International Business Finance (6 sp.) D0O53A International Business Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0O53a Sercu
Major 5: Marketing Management
Students are required to take the Master’s thesis (15 ECTS) and the courses (24 ECTS).Master's Thesis Marketing Management (15 sp.) D0O50A Master's Thesis Marketing Management (15 sp.) 0u. D0O50a N. Global, B2B and Service Marketing (6 sp.) D0R36A Global Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0R36a Edeling B2B Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S04a Edeling Service Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S05a Edeling Digital Marketing (6 sp.) D0Q05A Digital Marketing (6 sp.) 39u. D0Q05a Larivière, Henkens (plaatsvervanger) Brand Management (6 sp.) D0R42A Brand Management (6 sp.) 36u. D0R42a Edeling Socially Responsible Marketing (6 sp.) D0O51A S.Dewitte (coördinator) Socially Responsible Marketing (6 sp.) 36u. D0O51a Dewitte, Faseur
Major 6: Personnel and Organization
Major 6 Personnel and Organization: Core
Students are required to take the Master’s Thesis.Master's Thesis Personnel and Organization (15 sp.) D0O85A Master's Thesis Personnel and Organization (15 sp.) 0u. D0O85a N.
Major 6 Personnel and Organization: Electives
Students choose elective courses for 24 ECTS. ‘Arbeidsrecht en onderneming’ (C08I7A) is taught in Dutch and aims at students with an interest in Belgian labour law.
Students can choose either Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (C08I7A) or Labour Policy and Law, including Discussion Sessions (C01M7A), but cannot take up both courses in their study programme.
Students who have already successfully completed Labour Economics (D0E35A) during their bachelor at KU Leuven (attained a credit for this course), cannot take up this course again in the Master of Business Economics or get an exemption for this course in the Master of Business Economics. They are required to pick a different elective within the major.Talent Management (6 sp.) D0R26A Talent Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R26a Dries, van Zelderen (plaatsvervanger) Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives (6 sp.) D0R27A Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part I (3 sp.) 18u. D0O87a Janssens, Terlinden (plaatsvervanger) Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part II (3 sp.) 18u. D0R27a Janssens, Terlinden (plaatsvervanger) Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (6 sp.) C08I7A F.Hendrickx (coördinator) Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (6 sp.) 39u. C07C7a Engels, Hendrickx Labour Economics (6 sp.) D0E35A Labour Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0E35a Zillessen Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) D0M24B Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) 39u. D0M24a Janssens, De Coster (plaatsvervanger) Labour Policy and Law (6 sp.) C01M7A Labour Policy and Law (6 sp.) 39u. C01M7a Hiessl
Minors
Students choose one minor and select courses for 12 ECTS within this minor.Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation
Innovation Management and Strategy (6 sp.) D0H36A Innovation Management and Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0H36a Van Looy Political Business Strategy (6 sp.) D0R23A Political Business Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0R23a Crombez Applied Game Theory and Economics of Information (6 sp.) D0M59B C.Crombez (coördinator) Applied Game Theory (3 sp.) 15u. D0M59a Crombez Economics of Information (3 sp.) 12u. D0M91a Seldeslachts Economics of Global Innovation (6 sp.) D0R22A Economics of Global Innovation (6 sp.) 39u. D0R22a Veugelers Competitive Analysis and Strategy (6 sp.) D0R43A Competitive Analysis and Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0R43a Belderbos Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) D0O43A Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) 18u. D0O43a Leten Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) D0O44A Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O44a Leten
Minor 2: International Business
Global, B2B and Service Marketing (6 sp.) D0R36A Global Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0R36a Edeling B2B Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S04a Edeling Service Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S05a Edeling International Management (6 sp.) D0M23B International Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0M23a Alekseeva International Business Strategy (6 sp.) D0M19B International Business Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0M19a Slangen Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) D0M24B Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) 39u. D0M24a Janssens, De Coster (plaatsvervanger) Managerial Aspects of European Integration (6 sp.) D0M57B Managerial Aspects of European Integration (6 sp.) 39u. D0M57a van Gruisen
Minor 3: Entrepreneurship
Only accessible for students who have not chosen the major Entrepreneurship. cannot choose the minor Entrepreneurship.
Students who selected or already followed the course 'D0O54A Business Finance' can not take the course 'D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance' and vice versa.The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (6 sp.) D0O40A The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (6 sp.) 39u. D0O40a Mödl Organising for Entrepreneurship (3 sp.) D0O45A Organising for Entrepreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O45a Bruneel Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) D0O43A Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) 18u. D0O43a Leten Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) D0O44A Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O44a Leten Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) 18u. D0O46a Mariathasan Entrepreneurship and New Business Development (6 sp.) D0O37A Entrepreneurship: Models and Ingredients (2 sp.) 36u. D0O39a Debrulle Entrepreneurship: Development of a Business Plan (4 sp.) 18u. D0O64a Debrulle
Minor 4: Accounting and Financial Management
Students who have already completed both D0R50A International Accounting and D0T28A Consolidatie en financiële bedrijfsdoorlichting (credit or tolerance) may not take D0O86A International and Group Accounting.Strategic Financial Management (6 sp.) D0R05A Strategic Financial Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R05a Mulier Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (6 sp.) D0R87A Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (6 sp.) 39u. D0R87a Verriest Sustainable Business, Reporting and Governance (6 sp.) D0O83A N.Houthaeve (coördinator) Governance (3 sp.) 18u. D0N73a Bellefroid Sustainable Business and Reporting (3 sp.) 18u. D0O83a Brehmen, Houthaeve International and Group Accounting (6 sp.) D0O86A International and Group Accounting (6 sp.) 39u. D0O86a Simac, Dekeyser (plaatsvervanger), Neijens (plaatsvervanger) Internal Control and Risk Management (6 sp.) D0R51A Internal Control and Risk Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R51a N.
Minor 5: Financial Economics
Students who selected or already followed the course ‘D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance’ cannot take the course ‘D0O54A Business Finance', and vice versa.Trading and Exchanges (6 sp.) D0C14A Trading and Exchanges (6 sp.) 39u. D0C14a Wuyts Investments (6 sp.) D0M32B Investments (6 sp.) 39u. D0M32a Smedts Credit and Banking (6 sp.) D0O52A Credit and Banking (6 sp.) 39u. D0O52a Degryse Behavioural Finance (6 sp.) D0O82A R.Goncharenko (coördinator) Behavioural Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0O82a Goncharenko, Thewissen Business Finance (6 sp.) D0O54A Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) 18u. D0O46a Mariathasan Financing Mature Firms (3 sp.) 21u. D0O54a Mariathasan
Minor 6: Production and Logistics
Students are recommended to thoroughly check the prerequisites of the courses of this minor.
'D0R20A Seminar Operations Management’ can only be taken by students who took the courses of the “Major 2: Productie en logistiek” during their bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen.Project Management and Scheduling (6 sp.) D0R18A Project Management and Scheduling (6 sp.) 39u. D0R18a Demeulemeester Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (6 sp.) D0S92A Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (6 sp.) 39u. D0S92a Udenio Castro Seminar Operations Management (6 sp.) D0R20A Seminar Operations Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R20a Demeulemeester
Minor 7: Quantitative Marketing
Market Response Models (6 sp.) D0R14A Market Response Models (6 sp.) 39u. D0R14a Dekimpe Marketing Strategy Modelling (6 sp.) D0R16A Marketing Strategy Modelling: Theory (3 sp.) 20u. D0R16a Lamey Marketing Strategy Modelling: Practice (3 sp.) 20u. D0S03a Lamey Behavioral Economics (6 sp.) D0R80A Behavioral Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0R80a Dewitte
Minor 8: Marketing Management
Only accessible for students not majoring in Marketing Management.Global, B2B and Service Marketing (6 sp.) D0R36A Global Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0R36a Edeling B2B Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S04a Edeling Service Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S05a Edeling Digital Marketing (6 sp.) D0Q05A Digital Marketing (6 sp.) 39u. D0Q05a Larivière, Henkens (plaatsvervanger) Brand Management (6 sp.) D0R42A Brand Management (6 sp.) 36u. D0R42a Edeling Socially Responsible Marketing (6 sp.) D0O51A S.Dewitte (coördinator) Socially Responsible Marketing (6 sp.) 36u. D0O51a Dewitte, Faseur
Minor 9: Economics and Policy
Environmental Economics (6 sp.) D0M36B Environmental Economics (3 sp.) 26u. D0M36a Vosooghi Environmental Economics: Exercises and Laboratory Sessions (3 sp.) 12u. D0O31a Vosooghi Health Economics (6 sp.) D0C23A Health Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0C23a N. Inequality and the Labour Market (6 sp.) D0M46B Inequality and the Labour Market (6 sp.) 26u. D0M46a Ciscato, Ciscato (medewerker) Development Economics (6 sp.) D0M43B Development Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0M43a Vandewalle Welfare Economics (6 sp.) D0M44B Welfare Economics (6 sp.) 26u. D0M44a Schokkaert
Minor 10: Informatics for Business Economics
Business Analysis (6 sp.) D0I68A Enterprise Analysis (3 sp.) 20u. D0I68a De Weerdt Business Process Management (3 sp.) 20u. D0I89a De Weerdt Data Science for Business (6 sp.) D0I74A W.Verbeke (coördinator) Data Science for Business (6 sp.) 52u. D0I74a Baesens, Verbeke
Minor 11: Personnel and Organization
Students who have already successfully completed Labour Economics (D0E35A) during their bachelor at KU Leuven (attained a credit for this course), cannot take up this course again in the Master of Business Economics or get an exemption for this course in the Master of Business Economics. They are required to pick a different elective within the minor.Talent Management (6 sp.) D0R26A Talent Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R26a Dries, van Zelderen (plaatsvervanger) Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives (6 sp.) D0R27A Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part I (3 sp.) 18u. D0O87a Janssens, Terlinden (plaatsvervanger) Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part II (3 sp.) 18u. D0R27a Janssens, Terlinden (plaatsvervanger) Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) D0M24B Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) 39u. D0M24a Janssens, De Coster (plaatsvervanger) Labour Economics (6 sp.) D0E35A Labour Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0E35a Zillessen
Electives
Students choose one course (min. 3 ECTS) out of the groups of free electivesElectives: Internships, projects and summer schools
The maximum number of ECTS to be included from this group is limited to 10% of the Master's programme (6 ECTS). Students who want to valorize an experience in their programme, can select the following courses, with a maximum of one course per group:
- A summer school: Short mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters)
- A substantial contribution to a business relevant or social- project: Integrated Business Project / Social Profit Project
- A business - or research experience: Internship project / Research project @ FEB
Note: only after approval, the elective courses can be included in the ISP. The application procedure can be consulted in the course description.Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (3 sp.) D0N49A Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (3 sp.) 0u. D0N49a N., Geers (medewerker), Steijleman (medewerker) Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (6 sp.) D0N50A Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (6 sp.) 0u. D0N50a N., Geers (medewerker), Steijleman (medewerker) Internship Project (6 sp.) D0N45A Internship Project (6 sp.) 160u. D0N45a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Research Project @FEB (6 sp.) D0N47A Research Project @FEB (6 sp.) 160u. D0N47a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Internship Project (master) (3 sp.) D0E61A Internship Project (master) (3 sp.) 0u. D0E61a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (6 sp.) D0N65A Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (6 sp.) 0u. D0N65a N., Geers (medewerker), Steijleman (medewerker) Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (3 sp.) D0N67A Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (3 sp.) 0u. D0N67a N., Geers (medewerker), Steijleman (medewerker) Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (6 sp.) D0N75A Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (6 sp.) 0u. D0N75a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (3 sp.) D0N78A Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (3 sp.) 0u. D0N78a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Internship Project (6 sp.) D0N46A Internship Project (6 sp.) 160u. D0N46a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Research Project @FEB (6 sp.) D0N48A Research Project @FEB (6 sp.) 160u. D0N48a N., Hoofdt (medewerker) Internship Project (master) (3 sp.) D0E62A Internship Project (master) (3 sp.) 0u. D0E62a N., Hoofdt (medewerker)
Electives: Corporate Social Responsibility
Governance (3 sp.) D0N73A Governance (3 sp.) 18u. D0N73a Bellefroid Sustainable Business and Reporting (3 sp.) D0O84A N.Houthaeve (coördinator) Sustainable Business and Reporting (3 sp.) 18u. D0O83a Brehmen, Houthaeve Responsible Organizations: Critical Perspectives, Part I (3 sp.) D0O87A Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part I (3 sp.) 18u. D0O87a Janssens, Terlinden (plaatsvervanger)
Electives: University-wide electives
The Science of Human Movement (3 sp.) L00G8A The Science of Human Movement (3 sp.) 26u. L00G8a Jonkers
Electives: Languages
Electives languages: Business English III
Students who have obtained their FEB Bachelor's degree at KU Leuven may select 'D0T37A/D0T78A Business English III': if they meet the prerequisites and have therefore successfully completed Economisch Engels I and II or have used a tolerance for this.
Students who already followed “Businesss English III” in their Bachelor’s, cannot take ‘D0T37A’ or ‘D0T78A’ again in their ISP or exempt it.
Students who have not obtained a Bachelor's degree from FEB KU Leuven may select 'D0T37A/D0T78A Business English III': if they have an advanced level of English as demonstrated through an internationally recognised test (IELTS band 7, TOEFL ibt 100, a CPE or CAE). The student must contact the teacher at the latest by the end of the first week of the first (or second) semester to establish an appointment to determine the level.
Students select maximum one course, depending on the scheduling in the first or second semester.Business English III (3 sp.) D0T37A Business English III (3 sp.) 26u. D0T37a Laffut, Rubin (medewerker), Uffing (medewerker) Business English III (3 sp.) D0T78A Business English III (3 sp.) 26u. D0T78a Laffut, Rubin (medewerker), Uffing (medewerker)
Electives: from majors and minors
Students who want to keep their ISP to 60-61 ECTS, can choose an elective from the group 'Electives from majors en minors for 3-4 ECTS'.
Students who want to take up more than 60-61 ECTS in their ISP, can choose an elective from the group 'Electives from majors en minors for 6 ECTS'.Electives from majors and minors for 3-4 ECTS
Students who selected or already followed the course ‘D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance’ can not take the course ‘D0O54A Business Finance’ and vice versa.Organising for Entrepreneurship (3 sp.) D0O45A Organising for Entrepreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O45a Bruneel Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) D0O43A Strategic IP Management (3 sp.) 18u. D0O43a Leten Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) D0O44A Intrapreneurship (3 sp.) 18u. D0O44a Leten Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) 18u. D0O46a Mariathasan
Electives from majors and minors for 6 ECTS
'D0R20A Seminar Operations Management’ can only be taken by students who took the major 2: Productie en logistiek" during their bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen.
Students who selected or already followed the course 'D0O46A Entrepreneurial Finance' cannot take the course 'D0O54A Business Finance, and vice versa.
Students can choose either Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (C08I7A) or Labour Policy and Law, including Discussion Sessions (C01M7A), but cannot take up both courses in their study programme.
Students who have already successfully completed Labour Economics (D0E35A) during their bachelor at KU Leuven (attained a credit for this course), cannot take up this course again in the Master of Business Economics or get an exemption for this course in the Master of Business Economics. They are required to pick a different elective.
Students who have already completed both D0R50A International Accounting and D0T28A Consolidatie en financiële bedrijfsdoorlichting (credit or tolerance) may not take D0O86A International and Group Accounting.Innovation Management and Strategy (6 sp.) D0H36A Innovation Management and Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0H36a Van Looy Environmental Economics (6 sp.) D0M36B Environmental Economics (3 sp.) 26u. D0M36a Vosooghi Environmental Economics: Exercises and Laboratory Sessions (3 sp.) 12u. D0O31a Vosooghi Trading and Exchanges (6 sp.) D0C14A Trading and Exchanges (6 sp.) 39u. D0C14a Wuyts Macro-Finance (6 sp.) D0C15A Macro-Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0C15a Dewachter Strategic Financial Management (6 sp.) D0R05A Strategic Financial Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R05a Mulier Market Response Models (6 sp.) D0R14A Market Response Models (6 sp.) 39u. D0R14a Dekimpe Marketing Strategy Modelling (6 sp.) D0R16A Marketing Strategy Modelling: Theory (3 sp.) 20u. D0R16a Lamey Marketing Strategy Modelling: Practice (3 sp.) 20u. D0S03a Lamey Project Management and Scheduling (6 sp.) D0R18A Project Management and Scheduling (6 sp.) 39u. D0R18a Demeulemeester Political Business Strategy (6 sp.) D0R23A Political Business Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0R23a Crombez Talent Management (6 sp.) D0R26A Talent Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R26a Dries, van Zelderen (plaatsvervanger) Global, B2B and Service Marketing (6 sp.) D0R36A Global Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0R36a Edeling B2B Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S04a Edeling Service Marketing (2 sp.) 13u. D0S05a Edeling Data Science for Business (6 sp.) D0I74A W.Verbeke (coördinator) Data Science for Business (6 sp.) 52u. D0I74a Baesens, Verbeke Health Economics (6 sp.) D0C23A Health Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0C23a N. Applied Game Theory and Economics of Information (6 sp.) D0M59B C.Crombez (coördinator) Applied Game Theory (3 sp.) 15u. D0M59a Crombez Economics of Information (3 sp.) 12u. D0M91a Seldeslachts Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (6 sp.) D0R87A Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (6 sp.) 39u. D0R87a Verriest International Management (6 sp.) D0M23B International Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0M23a Alekseeva Investments (6 sp.) D0M32B Investments (6 sp.) 39u. D0M32a Smedts Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (6 sp.) D0S92A Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (6 sp.) 39u. D0S92a Udenio Castro The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (6 sp.) D0O40A The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (6 sp.) 39u. D0O40a Mödl Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (6 sp.) C08I7A F.Hendrickx (coördinator) Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (6 sp.) 39u. C07C7a Engels, Hendrickx Credit and Banking (6 sp.) D0O52A Credit and Banking (6 sp.) 39u. D0O52a Degryse International Business Finance (6 sp.) D0O53A International Business Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0O53a Sercu Digital Marketing (6 sp.) D0Q05A Digital Marketing (6 sp.) 39u. D0Q05a Larivière, Henkens (plaatsvervanger) Behavioural Finance (6 sp.) D0O82A R.Goncharenko (coördinator) Behavioural Finance (6 sp.) 39u. D0O82a Goncharenko, Thewissen International and Group Accounting (6 sp.) D0O86A International and Group Accounting (6 sp.) 39u. D0O86a Simac, Dekeyser (plaatsvervanger), Neijens (plaatsvervanger) Labour Economics (6 sp.) D0E35A Labour Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0E35a Zillessen Seminar Operations Management (6 sp.) D0R20A Seminar Operations Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R20a Demeulemeester Economics of Global Innovation (6 sp.) D0R22A Economics of Global Innovation (6 sp.) 39u. D0R22a Veugelers Brand Management (6 sp.) D0R42A Brand Management (6 sp.) 36u. D0R42a Edeling Competitive Analysis and Strategy (6 sp.) D0R43A Competitive Analysis and Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0R43a Belderbos Internal Control and Risk Management (6 sp.) D0R51A Internal Control and Risk Management (6 sp.) 39u. D0R51a N. Behavioral Economics (6 sp.) D0R80A Behavioral Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0R80a Dewitte International Business Strategy (6 sp.) D0M19B International Business Strategy (6 sp.) 39u. D0M19a Slangen Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) D0M24B Organizing in an International Context (6 sp.) 39u. D0M24a Janssens, De Coster (plaatsvervanger) Managerial Aspects of European Integration (6 sp.) D0M57B Managerial Aspects of European Integration (6 sp.) 39u. D0M57a van Gruisen Development Economics (6 sp.) D0M43B Development Economics (6 sp.) 39u. D0M43a Vandewalle Welfare Economics (6 sp.) D0M44B Welfare Economics (6 sp.) 26u. D0M44a Schokkaert Inequality and the Labour Market (6 sp.) D0M46B Inequality and the Labour Market (6 sp.) 26u. D0M46a Ciscato, Ciscato (medewerker) Socially Responsible Marketing (6 sp.) D0O51A S.Dewitte (coördinator) Socially Responsible Marketing (6 sp.) 36u. D0O51a Dewitte, Faseur Introduction to Auditing and International Auditing Standards (6 sp.) D0N77A M.Willekens (coördinator) International Auditing Standards (3 sp.) 26u. D0N76a N., Helsen (plaatsvervanger) Introduction to Auditing (3 sp.) 26u. D0R92a Willekens, Sufaj (plaatsvervanger) Business Finance (6 sp.) D0O54A Entrepreneurial Finance (3 sp.) 18u. D0O46a Mariathasan Financing Mature Firms (3 sp.) 21u. D0O54a Mariathasan Management Control and Cost Management (6 sp.) D0O58A Management Control and Cost Management (6 sp.) 52u. D0O58a N. Labour Policy and Law (6 sp.) C01M7A Labour Policy and Law (6 sp.) 39u. C01M7a Hiessl Entrepreneurship and New Business Development (6 sp.) D0O37A Entrepreneurship: Models and Ingredients (2 sp.) 36u. D0O39a Debrulle Entrepreneurship: Development of a Business Plan (4 sp.) 18u. D0O64a Debrulle
ECTS Labour Policy and Law (B-KUL-C01M7A)
Aims
Learning goals:
After completing this course the student is able to:
- identify and enumerate the challenges globalization presents to labour regulation systems
- identify and enumerate the challenges that non-standard work and platform work in the “gig-economy” presents to labour protection
- understand and elucidate the function of international labour law in governing globalisation
- understand and explain the functioning of the International Labour Organisation and its role in developing and supervising the application of international labour law and standards
- understand and give detailed account of the role the European Convention of Human Rights and the European Court of Human Rights play on individual and collective work relations in the countries members of the Council of Europe, also by referring to specific
- appreciate and critically analyze the ever increasing impact that international labour standards and Council of Europe instruments play in national and regional labour policies as well as in private mechanisms of governance of labour, including international framework agreements and companies’ codes of conduct
Learning outcomes:
This course contributes to the following learning outcomes:
PLO 1:
In addition to basic knowledge of the law, the student also possesses comprehensive, integrated knowledge of the national, European and international law of certain related general legal domains (defined in our institution as private law, public law, criminal law, social law, economic law, tax law, international and European law) and has a clear understanding of the interaction of these three legal orders, in which knowledge of positive law is accompanied by an understanding of the foundations and principles of the law.
The student:
1.1 is able to accurately describe the current stance related to a legal issue, briefly as well as in detail
1.2 is able to identify the legal aspects of a social problem
1.3 is able to analyse and assess a legal problem and formulate a substantiated position or solution on the matter
1.4 is able to analyse and assess a social problem and formulate a substantiated position or solution on the matter
1.5 is able to integrate the acquired knowledge and insights in the respective (national, European, international) legal orders based on the multi-layered nature of law.
PLO 3:
The student is able to position legal arguments and reasoning in a social, historical, and/or value-oriented context, stemming from a critical and reflexive fundamental attitude related to law, humanity and society.
The student:
3.1 is able to identify and put into practice the interaction between the law, man and society and the related norms and values in a legal context
3.2 is able to identify and put into practice the dynamics of the law using the historical development of that law in a legal context
3.3 is able to develop and critically remove him or herself from a framework of reference related to people and society
Previous knowledge
Introduction to Labour Law is recommended.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de rechten (Leuven) (Major sociaal recht) 120 ects.
- Master in de rechten (Leuven) (Minor sociaal recht) 120 ects.
- Master of European Social Security (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Law (double degree with Zurich) (Leuven et al) 120 ects.
- Master of Laws (LL.M) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Personnel and Organisation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Law and Criminology (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Labour Policy and Law (B-KUL-C01M7a)
Content
Description of the subjects dealt with (e.g. by means of the table of contents):
- The impact of globalization (global trade, offshoring, export processing zones) and technological advances on labour conditions in developed and developing countries the national labour policies adopted in response to this impact.
- The implications of the rise and spread of non-standard work and platform work in the “gig-economy” on labour and social protection systems
- The notion of international labour law as a global system of governance of labour relations to mitigate a race to the bottom in working conditions around the world.
- The role of the ILO in creating international labour law and in promoting international labour standards and decent work and labour policies at the international, regional and national level.
- The structure and functioning of the ILO and the process of adoption of international labour standards.
- The fundamental principles and rights at work of the ILO:
(a) freedom of association and the effective recognition of the right to collective bargaining;
(b) the elimination of all forms of forced or compulsory labour;
(c) the effective abolition of child labour; and
(d) the elimination of discrimination in respect of employment and occupation. - What are the positive and negative implications of globalization regarding fundamental principles and rights at work in developed and developing countries.
- The system of supervision of international labour standards within the ILO: its functioning, its “crisis” and the way forward.
- The protection of fundamental principles and rights at work in global supply chains and the labour policies adopted in industrialised countries to ensure compliance with fundamental rights in the lower tiers of the chain present in developed countries.
- The regulation of non-standard forms of employment and of platform work
- The role of international framework agreement and of corporate codes of conducts in shaping the governance of labour in global supply chains and global trade and the influence exerted on these instruments by soft regulation initiatives such as the ILO Multinational Declaration and the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises.
- The impact of Council of Europe’s instruments of protection of human rights on employment and labour policy. The European Convention on Human Rights and the employment relationship. The key judgments of the European Court of Human Rights on freedom of association in trade unions; prohibition of slavery and exploitative labour conditions; respect of private life and privacy at the workplace.
- The European Social Charter and its supervisory system.
- The growing incidence of ILO materials, including the opinions of the ILO supervisory bodies, and of the European Social Charter in the case law of the European Court of Human Rights
- The impact of International labour standards and of Council of Europe’s influence on national and regional labour policies in Europe, including on the EU law and policy.
Course material
Compulsory:
Legal instruments, cases and readings made available via Toledo.
Format: more information
Lectures are highly interactive. Students are expected to read the legal instruments, case law and readings beforehand and, after the general legal and doctrinal framework is explained by the teacher, they also are expected to engage in critical discussion over the materials made available to them.
In particular, in-depth analysis of case law, supervisory opinions and labour policy instruments will be guided and encouraged by the teacher. Active, informed and sound interaction in class will be positively rewarded in the final mark.
This course includes critical reflection and discussion of law and policy questions as a central element. Students are therefore asked to actively engage in class discussion. This will also be rewarded in the final grade. The details will be communicated at the start of the course.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Labour Policy and Law (B-KUL-C21M7a)
Explanation
The exam is constituted by written open questions on international labour standards and their interaction with national and regional (including European) policies. For the paper and presentation, students will work in pairs with a partner from a different country, to compare the approaches of the two different legal systems to a legal question.
Punctuality and conciseness of answers and the ability of pertinently referring to international sources of law, case law and doctrine discussed in class will form an essential subject of the evaluation. Active participation in class will be positively rewarded in the final mark.
ECTS Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (B-KUL-C08I7A)
Doelstellingen
Leerdoelen
Dit vak beoogt een grondige kennis te verschaffen van het arbeidsrecht.
Dit opleidingsonderdeel draagt bij tot volgende leerresultaten en kerndoelen:
De student bezit naast een basiskennis van het recht, ook een grondige, geïntegreerde kennis van het Belgische, Europese en internationale recht van bepaalde samenhangende basisrechtsdomeinen (in onze instelling gedefinieerd als privaatrecht, publiekrecht, strafrecht, sociaalrecht, economisch recht, fiscaal recht, internationaal- en Europees recht) en heeft een duidelijk inzicht in de wisselwerking van deze drie rechtsordes, waarbij de kennis van het positieve recht samengaat met inzicht in grondslagen en beginselen van het recht.
De student
• kan de huidige stand met betrekking tot een juridische kwestie, zowel bondig als diepgaand, accuraat beschrijven
• kan de juridische aspecten van een maatschappelijk probleem identificeren
• kan een juridisch probleem analyseren en beoordelen en hierover een onderbouwde stelling of oplossing formuleren
• kan de in de respectieve (nationale, Europese, internationale) rechtsordes verworven kennis en inzichten integreren tegen de achtergrond van de meergelaagdheid van het recht
De student bezit zowel gespecialiseerde (ten aanzien van basiskennis verbredende en verdiepende) kennis en inzicht in een aantal samenhangende basisrechtsdomeinen (in onze instelling gedefinieerd als privaatrecht, publiekrecht, strafrecht, sociaalrecht, economisch recht, fiscaal recht, internationaal- en Europees recht) alsook diepgaande kennis in transversale rechtsdomeinen die uitdrukking geven aan de samenhang en/of wisselwerking tussen de verschillende basisrechtsgebieden dan wel aan vernieuwing en dynamiek in het recht.
De student
• kan kennis en inzicht aanwenden op gespecialiseerd en gedetailleerd niveau bij vakinhoudelijke discussies en vragen
• kan kritisch positie innemen ten aanzien van maatschappelijke en/of juridische vernieuwing in transversale rechtsdomeinen en zich positioneren ten aanzien van out-of-the-box redeneringen of oplossingen in het recht
• kan de wisselwerking tussen verschillende samenhangende basisrechtsdomeinen duiden en operationaliseren
De student hanteert een systematische methode in zijn benadering van complexe juridische en maatschappelijke vraagstukken. Hij is in staat om zelfstandig een juridische analyse en synthese te maken van problemen met het oog op de beantwoording van vragen met een juridisch of maatschappelijk karakter. De student beschikt over het methodologische en argumentatieve vermogen om aanvaardbare oplossingen aan te dragen en te legitimeren en is in staat om op kritische wijze verklarende, evaluatieve en probleemoplossende standpunten in te nemen.
De student
• kan zijn/haar analytisch vermogen aanwenden om complexe juridische of maatschappelijke vraagstukken te verklaren, te evalueren of op te lossen.
• kan zijn/haar synthetisch vermogen aanwenden om complexe juridische of maatschappelijke vraagstukken te verklaren, te evalueren of op te lossen
• kan een afweging en een beargumenteerde keuze maken tussen verschillende juridische mogelijkheden
• kan creatieve of nieuwe juridische verklaringen of oplossingen aanreiken
• kan een eigen juridisch verantwoorde stelling formuleren over een juridisch of maatschappelijk probleem
Begintermen
• Kennen: juridische basisvorming in het algemeen en in het bijzonder met goed gevolg de basiscursus arbeidsrecht gevolgd hebben
• Kunnen: begin van zelfstandig wetenschappelijkonderzoeksvaardigheden
• Houding: kritisch denkvermogen; bijzondere interesse en gevoeligheid voor de sociale actualiteit en voor de consequenties daarvan voor het arbeidsrecht
Identieke opleidingsonderdelen
C07C7A: Arbeidsrecht en onderneming
Plaats in het onderwijsaanbod
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 sp.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Personeel en organisatie) 60 sp.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 sp.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 120 sp.
- Master in de sociologie (Leuven) 60 sp.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 sp.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 sp.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (B-KUL-C07C7a)
Inhoud
Het vak omvat een grondige studie van het arbeidsrecht. Hierbij wordt ingegaan op onderwerpen en ontwikkelingen die enerzijds van belang zijn voor de praktijk van het arbeidsrecht, als voor de academisch debat over het arbeidsrecht.
Onderwerpen die aan bod komen zijn: Europees arbeidsrecht, internationaal arbeidsrecht, internationale tewerkstelling en detachering, de aard van de arbeidsrelaties en schijnzelfstandighed, a-typische arbeid, uitzendarbeid en terbeschikkingstelling, welzijn op het werk, discriminatie in arbeidsverhoudingen, pesten op het werk en ongewenste intimiteiten, privacy op het werk, herstructurering, outsourcing en overgang van onderneming, vakbondsvrijheid en collectieve actie. Het is mogelijk dat een andere selectie wordt gemaakt in functie van hun relevante voor wetenschap en/of praktijk.
Studiemateriaal
• Er wordt gebruik gemaakt van een door de docenten samengestelde reader.
• Bijkomend zal relevante wetgeving, rechtspraak en rechtsleer beschikbaar worden gesteld via Toledo.
Komt ook voor in andere opleidingsonderdelen
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluatie: Arbeidsrecht en onderneming (B-KUL-C28I7a)
ECTS Trading and Exchanges (B-KUL-D0C14A)
Aims
After the completion of this course, the student will be able to:
- describe and model the behavior/decisions of different agents in international financial markets (various types of traders, dealers, regulators, …)
- model and explain price formation and market liquidity
- model and explain the impact of institutional features and properties of financial markets on their performance (liquidity, volatility, price formation, efficiency, …)
- model and explain order submission strategies
- model and explain fragmentation in trading
- model and explain international regulation and supervision of financial markets in a financial-economics framework
- have a profound, formal knowledge of theoretical and empirical models and techniques used to address the issues above
- evaluate critically models and apply them to concrete situations and research questions
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, students have a basic knowledge of finance, statistics and econometrics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 5: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Risk en finance) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Risk and Finance) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Risk and Finance) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) (Major Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Trading and Exchanges (B-KUL-D0C14a)
Content
This course is about trading and the international institutional context in which trading takes place. We investigate the people who trade various types of securities and contracts (stocks, bonds, derivatives, ... but also e.g. emission rights) , the trading venues where the trades are executed and the rules that govern trading. We thus look in detail at the decisions of various players in the markets including informed and uninformed traders, short- end long-term investors, brokers, ... . We model their optimal trading and price setting decisions and study the impact on markets in terms of price formation, liquidity, volatility, ... . Moreover we address the impact of institutional characteristics on these decisions and outcomes: the trading rules at the exchanges, the setup of an exchange and competition between trading venues. Finally, we study at various points the regulatory environment and model the trade-offs faced by regulators and supervisors of international financial markets. This course typically consists of different parts. Within each part, a number of topics are discussed.
Part 1: Financial Market Infrastructure
How do today’s international financial markets for trading securities operate? How does the trading and post-trading financial market infrastructure look like? What are the key players and their characteristics? This part introduces the key concepts and players and highlights differences in an international context.
Part II: Price Formation, Market Liquidity and Price Discovery
How do dealers set prices taking into account the costs and risks they face (order processing costs, inventory risk, asymmetric information risk, ...)? How can traders with superior information trade optimally (strategically) to exploit their information and what is the effect on markets in terms of prices, volatility, ... ? How can we measure certain concepts such as market liquidity, price impact or the probability of informed trading?
Part III: Endogenous order choice
What factors determine the optimal choice of a trader between various order types (limit, market and hidden order)? How does trading takes place without market makers and are markets able to absorb shocks? How do traders manage the risk of trading (e.g. the exposure of their orders or execution risk)?
Part IV: Competition between market places
In today's financial markets, trading occurs simultaneously in a number of trading venues, possible with a very different setup. Is competition between venues and the associated fragmentation of order flows beneficial? What are lit and dark market places? How do traders optimally determine their trading strategy in such an environment? What are the trade-offs for supervisors and what is the preferred regulation?
Part V: Post-Trade Infrastructure
What happens after a trade in concluded? How does clearing and settlement work?
Part VI: Special Topics
The last part of the course focuses on current “hot topics” in today's financial markets. Recent examples include an analysis of short-sale bans during the financial crisis, or the impact of uncertainty/ambiguity (as opposed to pure risk) on trading decisions and prices.
Course material
Used course material
* Toledo is being used for this learning activity to make course material availabe.
Format: more information
Each lecture starts from a concrete problem or situations. It is then shown how fundamental theoretical and/or empirical models can be used to analyze the problem and provide a solution. Both technical aspects and financial-economic intuition will be discussed, as well as the more general context and applications of each model.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Trading and Exchanges (B-KUL-D2C14a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* There's a final written exam (open questions) during the examination period. During the exam, students can use a calculator.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer(s), as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS Macro-Finance (B-KUL-D0C15A)
Aims
The course provides an in-depth analysis of price formation on financial markets. Within this framework, a pivotal role is played by the 'Fundamental Theorem of Finance' which implies the existence of a Stochastic Discount Factor (SDF) in a no-arbitrage environment. This SDF can be used to generate standard equilibrium pricing theories for, among others, stocks, bonds and exchange rates.
The main goals of this course are to (i) introduce the SDF approach to finance (ii) develop equilibrium pricing models for the different financial markets (stock, bonds and exchange rates) (iii) provide macro-finance theories of the stock and bond markets and (iv) discuss the empirical implications and evidence of these price theories.
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- understand the main financial theories (CAPM, Fama-French, Risk Neutral Pricing, Arrow-Debreu pricing) and in particular the role of systemic versus idiosyncratic risk factors in asset pricing
- use the above mentioned theories in assessing the impact of different types of fundamental (macro) factors (shocks) on financial markets
- apply the pricing methods in the analysis of specific and practical pricing problems of bonds, stocks and especially standard derivative products
Previous knowledge
Students have completed succesfully introductory courses in statistics, (macro)eonomics and mathematics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Economie) 120 ects.
- Master of Statistics and Data Science (on campus) (Leuven) (European Master of Official Statistics (EMOS)) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 3: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Economics) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Macro-Finance (B-KUL-D0C15a)
Content
The course can be divided into four main thematic sections:
Stochastic discounting. In this part we review the development of the Stochastic Discount Factor. In particular, we start from the standard deterministic discounting technique and show how general equilibrium Euler equations allow us to extend the main idea of deterministic discounting to stochastic discounting. This stochastic discounting technique allows in principle to price all assets. Standard financial concepts such as the risk-free rate, the mean-variance frontier, the Sharpe ratio and others are introduced and interpreted within this basic SDF framework.
Arbitrage Pricing Theories. In this part of the course we show that the SDF model does not depend on the exact equilibrium pricing model. Instead, SDF representations follow from imposing the absence of arbitrage opportunities. We introduce a formal definition of arbitrage opportunities and show that the absence of arbitrage implies the existence of a linear pricing function (the SDF). Within this theory we discuss the concepts of (in)complete markets, contingent claims and Arrow Debreu prices. While the development of the no-arbitrage theory is rather abstract we also provide the more practical market models that are implied by the no-arbitrage approach. In particular, we show how the standard CAPM model, the APT model and the Fama-French factor representation all follow as special cases of the Arbitrage Pricing Theories. Finally, we discuss the analysis of dynamic trading startegies
Macro-Finance theories. In this part of the course we return to the equilibrium interpretation of the SDF and try to identify it in terms of macroeconomic quantities. This macroeconomic interpretation is not pursued in relative pricing models such as CAPM, APT or Fama-French and requires additional structure. In particular, we focus on risk attitudes (Arrow-Pratt) measures of risk and intertemporal rate of substitution as implied by specific types of utility functions. A practical implication of the above framework is represented by a set of Macro-Finance theories, explaining financial prices based on macroeconomic developments. We will discuss some benchmark models as well as the well-known asset pricing puzzles.
Empirical analysis. Most of the analysis in the previous parts is theoretical in nature. In the last part of this course we focus on the practical and the empirical implications of the SDF theory. In particular, we focus on the main implication of SDF: under risk aversion some predictability should be present in financial markets (in the form of risk premia). We analyze bond, stock and exchange rate markets and identify the type of predictability implied by the data. Several time series models will be used in this part.
Course material
Used Course material
The course builds on the book: Danthine and Donnaldson (2005) "Intermediate Financial Theory", Elsevier Academic Press, isbn 0-12-369380-2
Additional Recommended Material
/
Toledo
* Toledo is being used for his learning activity.
Format: more information
This course takes mainly the form of lectures, organized around the five main themes of the course. Lectures may extend over several weeks and typically two weeks are foreseen for each topic. Next to the lectures, additional material -mainly readings and some exercises- are posted on Toledo. Students are expected to read the additional material and to solve the exercises. Active participation by students is strongly encouraged.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Macro-finance (B-KUL-D2C15a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
*The evaluation consists of a written, closed-book exam with closed questions.
Determination of final grades
*The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS Health Economics (B-KUL-D0C23A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
- to evaluate the theoretical concepts and empirical methods used in most current research papers that deal with health economics.
- to analyse various institutions in health insurance and health care provision within a coherent welfare economic framework taking into account efficiency and equity considerations.
- to analyse specific policy measures in the health care sector taking due account of the specific characteristics of the markets for health insurance and health care.
Previous knowledge
See entry qualifications for the Master of Economics. Students are expected to have mastered the course material given in the courses “Mathematical Analysis Microeconomic Problems” from the degree “Bachelor of economic sciences".
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Economie en beleid) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Economie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 9: Economics and Policy) 60 ects.
- Master in de beleidseconomie (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2022-2023)(Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Economics) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Voorbereidingsprogramma: Master in de economische wetenschappen / Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de beleidseconomie (programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Health Economics (B-KUL-D0C23a)
Content
* Institutions in the Belgian and US health care system.
* Specific characteristics of the commodity “health care”.
* Optimal health insurance and the health insurance market.
* Provider behaviour and remuneration.
* The impact of socio-economic status on health and vice versa.
* Private and public provision of health care.
Course material
Used Course Material
*Recent journal articles (made available at the beginning of the lectures) .
Additional Recommended Course Material
Textbook: Health Economics, Second Edition by Frank A. Sloan and Chee-Ruey Hsieh
Toledo
*Toledo is being used for this course.
Format: more information
Lectures on the theoretical aspects.
Group discussion of articles, prepared by students.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Health Economics (B-KUL-D2C23a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The evaluation consists of class participation (group discussions) with presentation and a final exam.
Class participation and presentation
* Students will be asked to give an individual presentation about the articles. This presentations will be followed by a group discussion.
* The deadline for the presentation will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Final exam
The final exam is a written exam with open questions.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- The class participation and presentation (50% of the final grade)
- The final exam (50% of the final grade)
* If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
*If the set deadline was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Information about retaking exams
For students who passed the class participation and presentation:
*The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
*Due to the nature of the class participation and presentation, the grade attained at the first examination opportunity will be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
For students who failed the class participation and presentation:
* The evaluation at the second examination opportunity will consist of an individual paper (50% of the final grade) and the exam (50% of the final grade).
*The deadline for handing in the paper will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
ECTS Labour Economics (B-KUL-D0E35A)
Aims
At the end of this course students should be familiar with:
- static and dynamic labor supply and labor demand
- labor market equilibrium under different labor market structures
- the effects of different policies and institutional features on labor market equilibrium outcomes
- key labor market indicators
- determinants and returns to human capital investments
causal analysis and main econometric techniques used in labor economics for the identification of causal relations
Previous knowledge
Students should have a good understanding of basic principles of economics, the competitive supply-demand model, imperfections (e.g. price and quantity controls), elasticity, static and dynamic optimization, and regression analysis.
Is included in these courses of study
- Bachelor in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Master in de sociologie (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 11: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major 2: Economie) 180 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major 2: Talen) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 1: Keuzetraject studenten campus Brussel) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 2: Economie) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 2: Talen) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Major: Economie) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Major: Talen) 180 ects.
- Master in de beleidseconomie (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2022-2023)(Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Personnel and Organisation) 120 ects.
- Bachelor of Business Engineering (Brussels et al) 180 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Sociology (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Voorbereidingsprogramma: Master in de economische wetenschappen / Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de beleidseconomie (programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Bachelor in de politieke wetenschappen en de sociologie (programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) (Optie economie) 180 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Labour Economics (B-KUL-D0E35a)
Content
The course starts with an introduction to Labor Economics and data and regression analysis.
The first part of this course deals with the competitive supply-demand model of the labour market, imperfectly competitive labor markets, and the effects of different policies such as welfare, payroll taxes, mandated benefits, and minimum wages.
The second part of the course deals with determinants of wages such as compensating wage differentials and general and specific human capital, and with the returns to education and inequality.
The last part of the course deals with the effects of migration and the analysis of unions and bargaining.
For all topics we will cover the theoretical models as well as the empirical analysis tools and evidence.
Course material
Used Course Material
George Borjas, Labor Economics, 7th edition.
Announcements and all relevant materials, including lecture notes, will be made available through Toledo.
Language of instruction: more information
English
Format: more information
Lectures consist of theory as well as empirical applications.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Labour Economics (B-KUL-D2E35a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* There is a closed-book written exam for this course, which counts for 80% of the final mark.
* In addition, during the course students will do short written at-home assignments which count for 20% of the final mark. Specific information about the characteristics and deadlines for this will be made available through Toledo
Determination of final grades
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule.
* The results for each written at-home assignment and the final exam are calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
* If the determined deadline for turning in an at-home written assignment is not respected, the final mark of the assignment will be 0/20, unless the student requested a new deadline due to justified reasons.
* The final grade is a weighted score determined as follows: the average result of the at-home written assignments make up 20% of the score, and the final exam makes up 80% of the score.
Information about retaking exams
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades can differ to those of the first examination opportunity.
* If the student does not achieve a sufficient final grade, he/she can retake the final exam.
* If the student obtained a sufficient grade at the first exam opportunity for the at-home written assignments, the grade for the written assignments will be transferred to the second exam opportunity, and the final grade will be determined as a weighted average as described above. Otherwise, the final grade for the second exam will be determined exclusively by the result of the retaken final exam.
ECTS Internship Project (master) (B-KUL-D0E61A)
Aims
Upon completion of the internship the student will be able to:
L1. better understand the varying aspects inherent to a professional work environment (e.g. the workplace conditions, the workplace culture, … ). Furthermore, the student will acquire relevant professional experience by participating actively in formal functional activities within an organization, but also by becoming familiar with informal organizational interrelationships.
L2. transfer new insights and perspectives on core competencies from theory to practice. The student will be able to integrate theoretical knowledge with hands-on experience and thereby grow in excellence within a particular discipline or area of expertise.
On completion of the internship the student will be able to use a number of versatile, personal and career-oriented skills. The Faculty of Economics and Business disseminates a number of specific educational goals concerning ‘Professional development for university graduates: skills and market demands.’
Previous knowledge
Master students are allowed to participate in an internship of three credit points provided that they meet the following criterium:
you have a maximum of 12 credits to complete in the Bachelor's degree program, the bridging program or the preparatory program.
Identical courses
D0E58A: Stageproject (master)
D0E57A: Stageproject (master)
D0E62A: Internship Project (master)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Information Systems Engineering and Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of International Business (Brussels) (Track 1: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Internship Project (master) (B-KUL-D0E61a)
Content
° The internship ties in directly with the student’s present domain of study at the FEB.
° It is solely the student’s responsibility to scout for a viable internship position
° The student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
° Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Not applicable
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Internship Project (master) (B-KUL-D2E61a)
Explanation
Evaluation characteristics
The final evaluation of the internship is based on two sources of information:
1. A performance report by the internship mentor in the company
2. An individual reflection report by the student
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Determination final result
*The faculty’s internship coordinator is ultimately responsible for the final score but will take into account the score of the internship mentor.
*If a student failed to show up on the performance interview and/or failed to hand in the reflective report in time, the student will obtain a ‘fail’ for the entire course.
*If a student fails to observe the deadline for handing in the evaluation documents the student will obtain a ‘fail’ for the course unless a new deadline was requested and formally acknowledged by the FEB based upon well-founded facts.
Important notice
Students who repeatedly or gravely breach the requirements as laid down in the agreement with the internship provider will be removed from the internship project and will obtain a ‘fail’. These students will not be entitled to do an alternative task and they will not have the opportunity to retake the internship project in any later examination period at this faculty.
Information about retaking exams
ECTS Internship Project (master) (B-KUL-D0E62A)
Aims
Upon completion of the internship the student will be able to:
L1. better understand the varying aspects inherent to a professional work environment (e.g. the workplace conditions, the workplace culture, … ). Furthermore, the student will acquire relevant professional experience by participating actively in formal functional activities within an organization, but also by becoming familiar with informal organizational interrelationships.
L2. transfer new insights and perspectives on core competencies from theory to practice. The student will be able to integrate theoretical knowledge with hands-on experience and thereby grow in excellence within a particular discipline or area of expertise.
On completion of the internship the student will be able to use a number of versatile, personal and career-oriented skills. The Faculty of Economics and Business disseminates a number of specific educational goals concerning ‘Professional development for university graduates: skills and market demands.’
Previous knowledge
Master students are allowed to participate in an internship of three credit points provided that they meet the following criterium:
you have a maximum of 12 credits to complete in the Bachelor's degree program, the bridging program or the preparatory program.
Identical courses
D0E57A: Stageproject (master)
D0E58A: Stageproject (master)
D0E61A: Internship Project (master)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Information Systems Engineering and Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of International Business (Brussels) (Track 1: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Internship Project (master) (B-KUL-D0E62a)
Content
° The internship ties in directly with the student’s present domain of study at the FEB.
° It is solely the student’s responsibility to scout for a viable internship position
° The student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
° Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Not applicable
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Internship Project (master) (B-KUL-D2E62a)
Explanation
Evaluation characteristics
The final evaluation of the internship is based on two sources of information:
1. A performance report by the internship mentor in the company
2. An individual reflection report by the student
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Determination final result
*The faculty’s internship coordinator is ultimately responsible for the final score but will take into account the score of the internship mentor.
*If a student failed to show up on the performance interview and/or failed to hand in the reflective report in time, the student will obtain a ‘fail’ for the entire course.
*If a student fails to observe the deadline for handing in the evaluation documents the student will obtain a ‘fail’ for the course unless a new deadline was requested and formally acknowledged by the FEB based upon well-founded facts.
Important notice
Students who repeatedly or gravely breach the requirements as laid down in the agreement with the internship provider will be removed from the internship project and will obtain a ‘fail’. These students will not be entitled to do an alternative task and they will not have the opportunity to retake the internship project in any later examination period at this faculty.
Information about retaking exams
ECTS Innovation Management and Strategy (B-KUL-D0H36A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
• Define, clarify and understand major concepts and topics which constitute the specific nature of innovation dynamics/innovation systems.
• Define and clarify concepts and models (rationale, ingredients, implications) relevant for defining and implementing an innovation strategy (on the level of the firm)
• Define and clarify concepts and models (rationale, ingredients, implications) relevant for organising new product development efforts (project level)
Previous knowledge
No specific prerequisites.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: International business, strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master of Bioinformatics (Leuven) (Bioscience Engineering) 120 ects.
- Master of Bioinformatics (Leuven) (Engineering) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de ingenieurswetenschappen: computerwetenschappen (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Biomedical Engineering (Programme for students started before 2021-2022) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Chemical Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Engineering: Energy (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Nanoscience, Nanotechnology and Nanoengineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Engineering Science (Leuven)
- Master of Mathematical Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Engineering: Computer Science (Leuven) 120 ects.
- EIT-KIC Master in Energy (Leuven et al) (Option: Energy for Smart Cities) 120 ects.
- EIT-KIC Master in Energy (Leuven et al) (Option: Smart Electrical Networks and Systems (SENSE)) 120 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Master of Mobility and Supply Chain Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- EIT-KIC Dual Degree Tracks in Sustainable Materials Engineering (Leuven) (EIT-KIC Dual Degree Track in Sustainable Materials Engineering: Option Sustainable Materials (Trento - Leuven)) 120 ects.
- EIT-KIC Dual Degree Tracks in Sustainable Materials Engineering (Leuven) (EIT-KIC Dual Degree Track in Sustainable Materials Engineering: Option Sustainable Metallurgy (Leoben - Leuven)) 120 ects.
- Erasmus Mundus Master of Science in Nanoscience and Nanotechnology (Leuven et al) 120 ects.
- Master of Electrical Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Biomedical Engineering (Programme for students started in 2021-2022 or later) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master in de ingenieurswetenschappen: artificiële intelligentie (Leuven) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Innovation Management and Strategy (B-KUL-D0H36a)
Content
Part 1: Technology and innovation dynamics/systems: Key concepts and Insights
Part 2: Defining and implementing an innovation strategy (at the level of the firm)
Part 3: Management of New Product Development processes (Project level)
Each part provides the students with a grounded and scientific approach towards important aspects of the innovation process. As a consequence, major scientific as well as application-oriented articles are provided as reading materials for each module.
The first part highlights the disciplinary roots or origins of the innovation process. More specifically, we highlight economic studies of the innovation process. These studies delve deeper into the work and insights of Joseph Schumpeter on the role of entrepreneurs and established companies and market pull and technology push dynamics. In addition we will elaborate insights on the level of innovation systems including the relevancy of (support) policies (e.g. patent systems) as well as the role of research centers and universities within such systems.
The second part develops models of the innovation process and examines the strategic management of technology and innovation on the level of the firm. Both defining an innovation strategy and implementing the innovation strategy by means of concepts and practices such as the development of technology portfolios (including selection criteria for innovation projects and programs) and technology roadmaps will be discussed. Major issues in organising the effective implementation of innovation strategies will be introduced (e.g. Organisational Ambidexterity, Venturing,.. .). We will also look at the nature and relevance of alliances and cooperation for the innovative performance of the firm.
The third part discusses the management of day-to-day operations in innovation environments. We discuss the following themes: (1) organising innovation activities and new product development projects, (2) critical success factors in managing innovation projects, (3) the concept of project performance in innovative settings, (4) techniques and approaches to support project management in innovative environments, and (5) the management of innovative teams and professionals.
Course material
Used Course Material
Handbook: Innovation Management and Strategy, Van Looy. McGraw Hill, 2016. (ISBN: 9781308882987)
Articles and literature
Slides, transparencies, courseware
Toledo
* Toledo is used for this learning activity to share readings, lecture slides, etc.
Format: more information
Students acquire in-depth insights in the management of innovation and technology in a course that combines traditional lectures and a group assignment.
For the group assignment students write a paper and give a poster presentation. Students demonstrate their ability to analyse and understand innovation dynamics. Given the scope of the course, topics can be situated at 3 different levels: innovation systems and policies, innovation strategies of firms and innovative products/projects (including business models).
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Innovation Management and Strategy (B-KUL-D2H36a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The written closed book exam assesses the extent to which the student has internalised the insights from the readings and lectures and is able to diagnose innovation dynamics, develop relevant arguments and understands consequences and implications of proposed actions.
* The paper and presentation should reflect that the student is able to analyse and understand the specific nature of their topic, to compare/situate the topic within the relevant (scientific) literature and to arrive at an assessment in terms of appropriateness. This is a group assignment.
* The paper and presentation are group assignments in teams of 4-6 people.
* For the paper the term of deliverance and deadline will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo. The deadline will be situated before the start of the examination period at the end of the semester.
* The final presentation date will be set by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo. The presentations will take place before the start of the examination period; at the end of the semester.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
* The final grade is a weighted score and consists of the following components: 60% on a written closed book exam; 40% on the written paper and presentation
* The grade for the paper is only taken into account if the student succeeds in the final exam.
* If the student does not participate in the written exam, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken) for the whole course.
* If the set deadline for the paper was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade, unless agreed otherwise by the lecturer. Changes in deadlines can only be considered in case of unexpected, severe, circumstances.
* If the student did not participate in the elaboration of the paper, the grades for the paper and presentation will be a 0-grade.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
* The student retakes that part of the evaluation (written closed book exam and/or paper and presentation) for which he did not pass. The grade obtained at the first exam opportunity for the part the student did pass, will be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
* If students did not pass for the paper and presentation (and did not pass overall), a tailor made trajectory (individual) for the paper can be considered/allowed.
ECTS Business Analysis (B-KUL-D0I68A)
Aims
After completing this course, the student is able to:
Part I
- apply methods and techniques relevant in the different stages of buiness analysis, including techniques for planning and monitoring
- model, optimize and improve business processes, rules and data in a business context by applying methods and techniques of business process/rule/data modeling and management
- analyze information problems in a professional manner and design solutions with attention to professional ethics (correctness, reliability)
- design in an independent and critical way an innovative solution for a relevant information problem in an organization
Part II
- understand how to use control-flow and resource constructs to model business processes, using different notations such as Petri nets, BPMN, EPCs, etc.
- translate process descriptions into process models using business process modelling software
- understand the essential concepts of process verification and validation
- analyse process using both qualitative and quantitative techniques
- understand which factors are important to improve and automate processes
- identify and argue about process improvements
- understand the workings of process mining techniques and how these can be used to analyse processes, including process discovery, compliance and performance analysis
- analyse process data using process mining techniques
Previous knowledge
The student should have finished an introduction to business information systems and an introduction to ICT. In particular, at the start of this course the student:
knows about the basic concepts of computer systems and software,
- has basic knowledge of structured programming
- understands the basics of business information systems,
- understands the role and application of information systems and enterprise architecture in an organisation,
- has basic knowledge of data modelling (ER or UML) and of process modelling with BPMN.
This conforms to what is taught in courses such as D0T06A of D0H17A "Introductory Management Informatics" and as D0T12A "Management Information Systems" of D0H27A “Business Information Systems”.
Identical courses
D0I81A: Business analyse
HMI01A: Business Analysis
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 10: Informatics for Business Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering: Double Degree UNamur (outgoing) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Enterprise Analysis (B-KUL-D0I68a)
Content
The contents of the course closely match the domain Business Analysis, as indicated in the Business Analysis Body of Knowledge (BABOK ® 2.0). That covers these "knowledge areas": Business analysis planning and monitoring, Requirements elicitation, Requirements management and communication, Enterprise analysis, Requirements analysis, Solution assessment and validation.
Contents:
- Business Analysis: Information strategy, information management, decision management, process management
- BABOK knowledge areas and techniques
- Requirements Engineering and Business modeling
- Business rules management, Business decision management, Decision modeling
- Declarative process modeling
- Project management
Course material
- Slides,exercices and extra papers are made available via Toledo.
- Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
There are no separate seminars: exercises are worked on during the lectures. In addition to the lectures, students must perform assignments independently.
Business Process Management (B-KUL-D0I89a)
Content
Business Process Management
- Process modeling
- Process verification & validation
- Process automation
- Quantitative process analysis – Process simulation
- Process redesign
- Process mining
Course material
• Course material
* Dumas, M., La Rosa, M., Mendling, J., Reijers, H. (2018) Fundamentals of Business Process Management, Second Edition, Springer
* van der Aalst, W. (2016) Process Mining – Data Science in Action, Second Edition, Springer
• Toledo
Toledo is used in this course Toledo
Format: more information
There are no separate seminars: exercises are worked on during the lectures. In addition to the lectures, students must perform assignments independently.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Business Analysis (B-KUL-D2I68a)
Explanation
Evaluation caracteristics
- The evaluation consists of a written multiple choice exam and one assignment.
- A correction for guessing is applied to the multiple choice exam.
- Deadlines are communicated via Toledo.
Determination final result
- The exam is assessed by the titular, as announced on Toledo and the exam regulations.
- The final result is calculated and expressed with a whole number on 20.
- The assignment is assessed on 6 out of 20 marks, the exam on the remaining 14 out of 20 marks.
- The score of the assignment cannot be used to compensate for a severe deficiency on the exam. If the score of the exam does not surpass 5.6/14 (without rounding), the assignment will not count and the score on the exam will be rescaled to a score out of 20.
Information about retaking exams
- The student has got the chance to take the exam twice per academic year: a first time in the first or second examination period, depending on the semester in which the course is programmed, and a second time in the third examination period.
- The evaluation properties of the second examination opportunity are equal to those of the first examination opportunity.
- The score for the assignment is automatically transferred to the second examination opportunity. Only in exceptional circumstances (e.g. long-term illness), the student can request to hand in a new assignment.
- The attributed score in the second examination opportunity is weighed in the same way as in the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Data Science for Business (B-KUL-D0I74A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Understand and explain what data science and analytics are.
- Understand and explain how different types of data-driven methods can be used in business to support decision-making and create value.
- Understand and explain the concepts of descriptive analytics (unsupervised learning), predictive analytics (supervised learning) and prescriptive analytics.
- Understand and explain the analytics process model.
- Understand and explain various data-driven methods, such as decision trees and ensemble methods, regression methods and neural networks, clustering methods, etc.
- Acknowledge the importance of data and suggest and apply recent technologies to analyze data for developing effective data-driven business solutions.
- Recognize and formulate different data-driven decision support solutions depending on decision problem characteristics.
- Evaluate the quality of analytical models.
- Implement, run and evaluate data analytical experiments using a specific toolset (for example, RapidMiner).
- Evaluate and discuss the application of analytics in real life business settings.
Previous knowledge
- At the beginning of this course, the student should be familiar with the fundamentals of information systems and their business applications, as taught in, for example, the course Business Information Systems (D0H27a).
- Students should be familiar with basic statistical concepts, such as probability distributions and probability calculus.
- Background knowledge of business economics is useful, but not strictly necessary.
- Programming knowledge is not a requirement, but students are expected to have general skills in using computers and software applications such as MS Word and MS Excel.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Informatica voor bedrijfseconomen) 60 ects.
- Master in het informatiemanagement (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2024-2025 in de master en/of in het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Kwantitatieve methoden) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Informatica voor handelsingenieurs) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve methoden) 120 ects.
- Master of Statistics and Data Science (on campus) (Leuven) (Statistics and Data Science for Business) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 10: Informatics for Business Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Quantitative Methods for Decision Making) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Business Informatics for Business Engineers) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Methods for Decision Making) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 126 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Kwantitatieve methoden) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Methods for Decision Making) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 127 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Methods for Decision Making) 127 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in het management (Programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) (Major Quantitative Methods for Decision Making) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Data Science for Business (B-KUL-D0I74a)
Content
Part 1: Data Science Foundations
- Chapter 1: Introduction to Data Science
- Chapter 2: Preprocessing
- Chapter 3: Predictive Analytics - Decision Trees
- Chapter 4: Postprocessing
- Chapter 5: Predictive Analytics - Nearest Neighbors and Ensembles
- Chapter 6: Predictive Analytics - Regression
- Chapter 7: Predictive Analytics - Artificial Neural Networks
- Chapter 8: Descriptive Analytics - Clustering, Association and Sequence analysis, Anomaly Detection
- Chapter 9: Prescriptive Analytics - Uplift Modeling and Causal Machine Learning
- Chapter 10: Prescriptive Analytics - Cost-sensitive Learning, Evaluation and Decision-making
- Chapter 11: Prescriptive Analytics - Multi-armed Bandits and Reinforcement Learning
Part 2: Data Science Applications
- Chapter 1: Credit Risk Modeling
- Chapter 2 Fraud Analytics
- Chapter 3: Customer Lifetime Value
- Chapter 4: Recommender Systems
- Chapter 5: Web Analytics
- Chapter 6: Other applications (HR Analytics, Sentiment analysis, Supply Chain Analytics, Ethics and AI)
Course material
Course material
- Course material will be made available on Toledo: slides, reader, etc.
- Course material consists primarily of what has been taught during lectures
Recommended Reading
- Foster Provost and Tom Fawcett, Data Science for Business: What You Need to Know about Data Mining and Data-Analytic Thinking, 1st edition, O'Reilly Media, ISBN-13: 978-1449361327
- In addition, articles and papers will be provided on Toledo.
Toledo
- Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Language of instruction: more information
English
Format: more information
The focus of this course is on explaining the learning content. Students are expected to critically and thoroughly study the theory and examples that are presented during the lectures.
Assignments take place during the academic year. Cases, demonstrations, guest lectures are also included.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Data Science for Business (B-KUL-D2I74a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* Assignments take place during the academic year and count for 20% of the final mark. Assignments may have to be carried out in teams of multiple students. The deadline for submitting the assignments will be communicated via Toledo by the lecturer.
* The final exam takes place on-campus, consists of multiple choice questions covering both parts (Part I: Data Science Foundations and Part II: Data Science Applications) of the course equally, and counts for 80% of the final mark.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
* There is a correction for guessing on multiple choice questions, unless indicated otherwise.
* The final grade is a weighted score consisting of one or more assignments (20%) and the final examination (80%). The assignments take place during the academic year.
Second examination opportunity
* The retake exam may consist of open questions or multiple-choice questions, or a combination of both.
* Marks for assignments are counted again in the third exam period. Students can retake assignments upon request by e-mail to the lecturer by July 10 latest.
ECTS International Business Strategy (B-KUL-D0M19B)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- define and clarify the principles and concepts underlying international business and strategy formulation
- apply theoretical and empirical contributions in academic research to real world cases
- to search for, and making good use of, publicly available information on firms, countries and industries
- critically analyze cases both independently and in team
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, the student should be familiar with basic knowledge of microeconomics (David Besanko and Ronald R. Braeutigam, Microeconomics. 4th edition, John Wiley & Sons).
The course D0M23B International Management, taking place in the second semester, could be recommended as complementary to this course.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: International business, strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: International business) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: International business, strategie en innovatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 2: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
International Business Strategy (B-KUL-D0M19a)
Content
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- define and clarify the principles and concepts underlying the international business strategy of multinational firms;
- describe the strengths and weaknesses of key academic contributions on international business strategy;
- apply concepts and theoretical and empirical insights on international business strategy to real world cases of multinational firms;
- critically analyze these cases within teams, and report on them in written form and orally.
By acquiring these skills, students will be better able to understand, develop, and implement successful international business strategies, i.e. strategies that enhance the performance of multinational organizations.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, the student should have a basic understanding of strategic management or international business. The course D0M23B International Management can be regarded as a useful complement to this course.
Course material
- Verbeke, A. & Lee, I.H.I. (2021) International Business Strategy, 3rd edition. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, ISBN: 978-1-108-73837-8.
- Selected academic and consultancy articles and book chapters
- Case studies and other assignments
- Lecture slides
- Guest lectures
- Class discussions and personal lecture notes
- Other courseware such as videos and podcasts
Students are expected to purchase Verbeke’s textbook themselves and well in advance. Toledo will be used to share all other relevant course materials.
Format: more information
Lectures (including possible guest lectures), assignments, student presentations, and feedback sessions.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: International Business Strategy (B-KUL-D2M19b)
Explanation
Evaluation
Type : Partial or continuous assessment with (final) exam during the examination period
Description of evaluation : Written, Paper/Project, Self assessment/Peer Assessment
Type of questions : Open questions
Learning material : None
Features of the evaluation
The evaluation consists of a final exam and assignments.
* The exam is a written, closed book exam and consists of both closed and open questions. Some of the questions may pertain to a text included in the exam, such as a case or a newspaper or magazine article. * The assignments consist of questions on the required readings and on documentation about real multinational firms, including cases. The assignments have to be made in teams of approximately 5 students. Submission dates will be determined by the lecturer (titularis) and communicated via Toledo.
Determination of final grades
* The final grade is based on the following components and weights:
- exam: 50%
- assignments: 50%
* Students who did not respect the deadline for an assignment will receive a grade of zero for that assignment, unless they asked the lecturer for an extension prior to the deadline. Such an extension will only be granted in the case of serious personal circumstances. Students who skip all of the assignments will receive an assignment grade of zero.
* To pass the course, students need to obtain an exam grade of at least 10 out of 20, regardless of their average assignment grade. If not, the exam grade will become the final grade for the course.
* Students who did not put enough effort into the assignments according to their teammates may be penalized with a lower assignment grade, including a grade of zero for students who did not contribute to the assignments at all.
* Students who did not take the exam will not receive a grade for the course, even if they handed in the assignments. Instead, such students will receive an “NA” (not taken) for the course.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of the grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above. The assignment grades will continue to form 50% of the final grade during the second examination opportunity within the same academic year. The assignment grades are not transferrable to the next academic year, nor to later years.
ECTS International Management (B-KUL-D0M23B)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student can:
- Understand cross-national differences in business environments
- Understand how cultural and institutional factors affect the management of international organizations
- Evaluate international business opportunities
- Identify key business decisions necessary to start an international expansion or an international business venture
Previous knowledge
Beside basic knowledge in Microeconomics, Industrial Economics and/or Industry & Competitive Analysis, an introduction to Management or Strategy is highly recommendable.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: International business, strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: International business) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: International business, strategie en innovatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 2: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
International Management (B-KUL-D0M23a)
Content
The goal of this course is to equip students with the knowledge and skills necessary to successfully manage businesses in a global environment. The course provides an overview of key challenges specific to companies and ventures operating in international context and introduces theoretical frameworks and practical tools for decision-making in a global setting. During the course, we will discuss three broad aspects of international management: (1) factors of the international business environment affecting the operation of multinational companies and the set-up of international business ventures; (2) methods of evaluating international business opportunities; and (3) crucial elements of managerial decision-making in an international context. After the course, students should be more prepared to better cope with challenges of working in multinational organizations or to explore entrepreneurial activities outside their national market.
Some of the topics discussed are:
- Opportunities and challenges in international management and entrepreneurship
- The role of social and cultural differences
- Economic, political, and legal aspects of operating in an international environment
- The role of technology
- Building and managing teams in a global context
- Identifying and evaluating international business opportunities
- Managing across borders
Course material
- A set of selected academic and business articles, book chapters
- Slides
- Examples and selected case material
- Toledo / e-platform
Format: more information
Lectures
Students are expected to study and evaluate selected cases, articles, book chapters, or supplementary study materials. Students are expected to participate actively in class by bringing questions and issues for discussion and by offering creative solutions to analysed business problems.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: International Management (B-KUL-D2M23b)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The exam is a written, closed-book exam. The exam covers lectures, articles, and cases indicated at each session as well as guest lectures. The exam may consist of conceptual questions (allowing students to show their understanding of the theory, tools, and concepts) and/or questions of case-study type (to address situations of international management and entrepreneurship in a company context).
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
* The final grade is based upon the written exam. However, students can earn extra points during the course via active class participation and individual or group work (more precise criteria for the allocation of extra points will be communicated via the e-platform).
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above. The extra points earned for class participation, or other work during the academic year, carry over to the third exam period.
Information about retaking exams
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above. The extra points earned for class participation, or other work during the academic year, carry over to the third exam period.
ECTS Organizing in an International Context (B-KUL-D0M24B)
Aims
The purpose of this course is to develop insights and guidelines of how to deal with cultural differences in a constructive way. The course will discuss 1) the meaning of culture and its relevance for organizations, 2) cross-cultural encounters with its challenges; 3) ways to deal with cultural differences.
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to
1) explain and analyze how culture and intercultural dynamics have an impact on organizational life and intercultural encounters in international organizations
2) critically identify and analyze underlying issues such as power, language and differences in interest that are related to cultural differences
3) critically reflect on behaviours and attitudes that facilitate or inhibit intercultural encounters at the workplace
Previous knowledge
Basic knowledge of organization theory, personal international experience or interest in gaining international experience is useful.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Personeel en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: International business) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 11: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 2: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Personnel and Organisation) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Educatieve master in de economie (Leuven) 90 ects.
- Master of Communication Sciences: Digital Media and Society (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Educational Studies (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Organizing in an International Context (B-KUL-D0M24a)
Content
1. Conceptualizing culture
2. Culture and organizational life
3. Intercultural encounters: communication, expatriate assignments and global teams
4. International human resource management: global careers and talent management
5. Intercultural skills
Course material
Used Course Material
Schneider, S.C. & Barsoux, J.L. (2011). Managing across Cultures. London: Prentice Hall.
Research articles, made available.
TOLEDO
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
The course consists of lectures and group presentations.
The lectures rely on case studies, experiential exercises and film fragments to conduct a meaningful discussion on the different topics at hand. The discussion will further relate to insights from scientific articles and research findings.
The group presentations involve discussion on the meanings of culture, the development of a cultural profile of a particular country profile and this in relationship to a particular international business topic (international negotiations, international conflict resolution, mergers & acquisitions, global ethics,...). Students are expected to present the main theoretical insights regarding the business topic, to identify the main values and assumptions that characterize a particular country and finally, relate both aspects to understand how the business topic emerges within and is influenced by the country's cultural values and assumptions.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Organizing in an International Context (B-KUL-D2M24b)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
*The evaluation encompasses three assignments
Individual assignment: an individual reflection paper which needs to demonstrate the student's understanding of the theories and studies discussed in this course.
Team assignment 1: a group presentation which needs to demonstrate students’ ability to analyze a documentary based on the course material (derive insights and address (solutions to) challenges they have identified in the documentary)
Team assignment 2:
1) a team paper which needs to demonstrates students’ ability to come up with a self-selected topic that relates to
the course, interview a relevant expert on this matter, and analyze the interview based on course material and other
scientific contributions.
2) a team presentation in which students show their ability to critically self-reflect on how they have worked together as
a cross-cultural team
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as an integer number between 0 and 20.
* The final grade is a weighted score which is determined as follows:
the 'Individual Paper' makes up 40% of the grade (Important: the student is required to pass the individual paper in order to pass the course)
Team assignment 1 and Team assignment 2 respectively make up 20% and 40% of the grade.
The division of grades across the different group assignments will be communicated by the lecturer via TOLEDO.
* Students need to obtain 10/20 or more on the individual paper to pass the course. For students who obtain less, the grade on the individual paper counts as the final grade for the course.
* If the student does not participate in one of the partial evaluations, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken) for the whole course.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and the second examination opportunity.
* At the second examination opportunity, the final assessment consists of a newly assigned individual paper. The group assignment is no longer taken into account for the final grade. The content and modalities (e.g. deadline) of this paper will be communicated by the lecture via Toledo.
Information about retaking exams
See ‘Explanation’ for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Investments (B-KUL-D0M32B)
Aims
This course aims at developing a thorough understanding of investments. The focus of this course is on financial theory for making investment decisions, its empirical evidence and practical relevance. Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Describe and analyze the investment environment
- Use the quantitative methods and models to calculate risk and expected return of stocks and bonds
- Apply finance theory to portfolio construction
- Develop and implement investment strategies
- Calculate and evaluate performance measurement and attribution
- Explain the efficient market theory and critically evaluate its relation with active versus passive investment strategies and behavioral finance
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, students have basic knowledge of quantitative methods/econometrics, principles of finance and capital markets.
Identical courses
D0R08A: Beleggingsleer en financiële producten
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 3: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 5: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Finance en financieel recht) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Investments (B-KUL-D0M32a)
Content
The focus of this course is on the theoretical foundations of equity and fixed income portfolio management, its empirical evidence and professional applications. The topics covered in this course can be broadly categorized into five groups:
- Portfolio theory: The course first provides the tools to evaluate rates of return and risk of equity and bond investments. Next, we lay out modern portfolio theory which aims to accomplish efficient diversification across broad asset classes, and across individual securities within these asset classes. Finally we introduce more advanced techniques of active portfolio management.
- Efficient market theory, and behavioral finance: We start with the efficient market hypothesis and demonstrate its implications. Being a useful framework to model financial markets, a review of the literature demonstrates that various stock market anomalies do exist. Hence, there are reasons to believe that active investment strategies can be effective. Finally, we elaborate on behavioral finance, which is concerned with lessons from psychology to explain the irrational investor behavior that leads to observed anomalies in financial markets.
- Fixed-Income and Credit Sensitive Instruments: We review pricing and the management of risks involved in debt securities. This includes basic default-free debt instruments, defaultable bonds (and thus credit risk) and credit derivatives. Moreover, we also study the term structure of interest rates, and analyze interest rate sensitivity of bonds. Finally, we introduce various fixed income portfolio management techniques.
- Portfolio performance evaluation: We introduce the tools to evaluate investment performance. To this end, we start with the measurement of portfolio returns and risk, and introduce different evaluation measures and methods. We explain the challenges that come with investment performance measurement and finally introduce the concept of performance attribution.
Course material
- Bodie, Z., A. Kane and A.J. Marcus (2014). Investments. 10th ed. (global edition). McGraw Hill Higher Education
- Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
Students are expected to follow the lectures and practice their knowledge and understanding of the material discussed via exercises. On Toledo, a discussion forum is opened where students can discuss the solutions to these exercises and the lecture material. This discussion is monitored by the lecturer. All modalities about the lectures are communicated via Toledo.
Throughout the course Excel is used to implement the concepts reviewed in the lectures. An assignment (part of the formal evaluation) further trains students on their skills to implement a portfolio optimization. The modalities of the assignment and deadlines are communicated via Toledo.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Investments (B-KUL-D2M32b)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
The evaluation consists of a final exam and an assignment. The final exam is a written exam with open questions. Students can use a calculator and formulae sheet. The assignment consists of a practical application of portfolio management. The modalities and deadline of the assignment are announced via Toledo.
DETERMINATION OF THE GRADES
- The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
- The final grade is a weighted score and consists of: the final exam counts for 80% of the final grade, and the assignment counts for 20% of the final grade.
- If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
- If the set deadline and/or modalities of the assignment are not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline/modified modalities. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
2nd EXAM OPPORTUNITY
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity: at the second examination opportunity, assignments are no longer part of the evaluation.
Information about retaking exams
* See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Environmental Economics (B-KUL-D0M36B)
Aims
This is a course on economic approaches to environmental and resource problems. The course is designed to provide in-depth knowledge of the main approaches, theories, models, and techniques in environmental and resource economics and some of its applications in pollution, climate change and in transportation economics. Furthermore, the course enables students to organise and integrate the materials to research on these topics.
Results
By the end of the course, all students are expected to be able to:
- demonstrate an understanding of key approaches and methods in environmental and resource economics,
- demonstrate an ability to analyse and apply taught models and techniques in environmental economics, and its applications,
- develop critical assessment skills in reviewing the literature and peer work,
- apply and integrate the acquired knowledge to produce research on environmental economics topics.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course students should have a good command of undergraduate-level microeconomics. This knowledge is essential.
No knowledge of environmental economics is required.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Economie en beleid) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Economie) 120 ects.
- Master in de ingenieurswetenschappen: energie (Leuven) (Algemene techno-economische energiekennis) 120 ects.
- Master in de ingenieurswetenschappen: energie (Leuven) (Elektrische energie) 120 ects.
- Master in de ingenieurswetenschappen: energie (Leuven) (Thermo-mechanische energie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 9: Economics and Policy) 60 ects.
- Master of Engineering: Energy (Leuven) (Option: Electrical Energy) 120 ects.
- Master of Engineering: Energy (Leuven) (Option: General Techno-Economic Energy Knowledge) 120 ects.
- Master of Engineering: Energy (Leuven) (Option: Thermo-Mechanical Energy) 120 ects.
- EIT-KIC Master in Energy (Leuven et al) (Option: Energy for Smart Cities) 120 ects.
- EIT-KIC Master in Energy (Leuven et al) (Option: Smart Electrical Networks and Systems (SENSE)) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Economics) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Environmental Economics (B-KUL-D0M36a)
Content
- Foundational environmental and resource economics
- Environmental valuations
- Cost and benefit analysis and discounting
- Integrated Assessment Models for Climate Change
- Government Responses to Pollution problems
- International Environmental Agreements
Course material
Used Course Material: for DOM36A:
- Pre-lecture material: set book chapters, set papers and set videos
- Lecture notes
- Essential textbook reading:
- R. Perman, Y. Ma, M. Common, D. Maddison, and J. Mcgilvray. Natural Resource and Environmental Economics. Pearson Education Limited, 2013.
- C. Kolstad. Intermediate Environmental Economics. Oxford University Press, international 2nd edition, 2011.
Format: more information
D0M36A: Lectures
D0M36B: Lectures and small exercises and class activities
Is also included in other courses
Environmental Economics: Exercises and Laboratory Sessions (B-KUL-D0O31a)
Content
Classes and seminars for student input and various group activities
Course material
- Pre-session material: set book chapters, set papers and set videos
- Exercise sheets and group work
- Essential textbook reading:
- R. Perman, Y. Ma, M. Common, D. Maddison, and J. Mcgilvray. Natural Resource and Environmental Economics. Pearson Education Limited, 2013.
- C. Kolstad. Intermediate Environmental Economics. Oxford University Press, international 2nd edition, 2011.
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
More operational study on environmental and resource economics and applications
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Environmental Economics (B-KUL-D2M36b)
Explanation
Evaluation caracteristics
All students have to sit for a final written closed-book exam. Students with D0M36B, in addition to the final written exam, are assessed by group activities during the semester and on the basis of a small project. The instruction for the project and the deadline for submitting the project will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via the virtual learning environment of the course.
All forms of assessments are in English.
Determination final result
Students with only D0M36A are assessed 100% by the closed-book written exam. For students with D0M36B, the final written exam contributes to 50% of their mark. The remaining 50% is split to 35% for the project and 15% for the class activities.
The grades are determined by the course holder, and announced via the virtual learning environment of the course and the examination schedule.
The result is computed and expressed as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Information about retaking exams
Only the exam can be retaken, not the class activities, or the project. The evaluation and determination of the grade for the retake exam will be based on the written exam only.
ECTS Development Economics (B-KUL-D0M43B)
Aims
The purpose of this course is to familiarise students with the economics of low-income countries and how theoretical and empirical methodologies can be used to analyse some of these countries' economic problems.
On completion of this module, students who attain the appropriate standard will have:
• Gained familiarity with theoretical tools of analysis of development economics.
• Surveyed empirical studies focussing on the main issues affecting the economy of low-income countries.
• Gained an understanding of some relevant policy issues for low-income countries.
• Improved their ability to critically read and assess scientific contributions in the literature on development economics.
Previous knowledge
Prerequisites Master of Economics.
Intermediate macroeconomics, microeconomics and econometrics. A sufficiently strong qualitative and quantitative background. Participants should have some notions of the problems of low-income countries, which can be acquired by reading an introductory development economics textbook.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Economie en beleid) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Industrie, technologie en globalisering) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Industrie, technologie en globalisering) 120 ects.
- Master of Cultural Anthropology and Development Studies (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 9: Economics and Policy) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Industry, Technology and Globalization) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Industry, Technology and Globalization) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Industrie, technologie en globalisering) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major Industry,Technology and Globalization) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Industry,Technology and Globalization) 127 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) (Major Industry, Technology and Globalization) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Development Economics (B-KUL-D0M43a)
Content
The first part of the course focuses on the role of market failures in poverty and underdevelopment. It discusses canonical papers in applied micro theory that lay out the constraints individuals face and recent empirical work evaluating programs that aim at alleviating those constraints. The lectures are organized around the topics of agriculture, entrepreneurship, credit markets and insurance.
The second part of the course covers different topics in advanced microdevelopment economics. The first lecture focuses on the role of savings and its potential as an alternative to microcredit. Other topics covered are poverty traps, health, gender, culture, norms and institutions. The lectures include references to seminal papers (and cover some theoretical work in more detail), but mainly focus on recent contributions to the respective literatures.
Course material
The reading list will be made available on Toledo shortly before the start of the module.
Format: more information
The course consists of a series of lectures, including substantial discussion.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Development Economics (B-KUL-D2M43b)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
An exam will evaluate students at the end of the academic year. The exam is closed-book and consists of several independent questions covering the different topics studied in class. Students cannot bring any material to the exam, with the exception of a standard calculator.
Determination of final grades
The lecturer assesses the exam, and the examination schedule is communicated through Toledo. The grade is expressed as an integer number between 0 and 20.
Second examination opportunity
During the academic year, a student has two chances to complete the exam: a first time during the first or second examination period, in accordance with the scheduled semester, and a second time during the third examination period. The evaluation criteria of the third examination period are identical to those of the first or second.
Information about retaking exams
Second examination opportunity
During the academic year, a student has 2 chances to complete the exam: a first time during the first or second examination period, in accordance with the scheduled semester, and a second time during the third examination period. The evaluation criteria of the third examination period are identical to those of the first or second examination period.
ECTS Welfare Economics (B-KUL-D0M44B)
Aims
This course gives an introduction to modern normative public economics and second best theory (with empirical applications) and explores the links with recent advances in social choice theory.
Upon completion of this course, the student can
*explain the trade-offs between different values (e.g. efficiency and equality)
*formalize in an adequate way different notions of justice
*analyse specific policy issues on the basis of a coherent ethical framework
Previous knowledge
Students should have followed a course in intermediate microeconomics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Economie en beleid) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Economie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 9: Economics and Policy) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Economics) 120 ects.
- Educatieve master in de economie (Leuven) 90 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Agro- and Ecosystems Engineering (Leuven) (Major Subject: Agricultural and Resource Economics) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Welfare Economics (B-KUL-D0M44a)
Content
- First best and second best
- Traditional social choice: Arrow’s impossibility theorem, social welfare functions, optimal income taxation, tax reform, no-envy criterion.
- Non-welfarist social choice: limitations of welfarism, Sen’s approach of basic capabilities, Paretian liberal and the theory of rights, compensation and responsibility, equality of opportunity (with empical applications: taxation).
- Empirical work on justice opinions in the population.
Course material
Used Course Material
*Recent papers from scientific journals. This material changes from year to year.
Additional Recommended Course Material
/
Toledo
*Toledo is being used for this course.
Format: more information
Lectures, group discussions.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Welfare Economics (B-KUL-D2M44b)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The evaluation consists of a written, open book exam with open questions.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS Inequality and the Labour Market (B-KUL-D0M46B)
Aims
This course aims at introducing students to influential economic theories that link changes in labor markets with recent trends in economic inequality.
Upon completion of the course the students will be able to
- Summarize the key insights from the different economic models studied in course and derive their policy implications.
- Identify the strengths and weaknesses of such models in light of sound empirical evidence and through the use of appropriate econometric methods.
Previous knowledge
Students are required to have completed graduate classes in macroeconomics (D0Q44A or equivalent), microeconomics (D0Q45A or equivalent), and econometrics (D0Q46A or equivalent).
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Economie en beleid) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Economie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 9: Economics and Policy) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Economics) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Sociology (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Inequality and the Labour Market (B-KUL-D0M46a)
Content
The course focuses on human capital as a key dimension of economic inequality.
Economists call human capital the stock of marketable knowledge, skills, and characteristics a worker has - innate or acquired - that contributes to her/his productivity in labor markets.
The course deals with the following questions:
- Do differences in human capital already emerge during childhood?
- How persistent is human capital inequality across generations?
- Can changes in production technology explain rising wage inequality and job polarization?
- How has the overall increase in college attendance changed the college wage premium?
- To what extent do observed characteristics (e.g., formal education) account for wage dispersion?
- How does having children affect the career of women and contribute to the gender wage gap?
Course material
The course material includes:
- The lecture slides
- A reading list (academic papers, handbook chapters)
All reading material is available online. There is no need to buy books.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Inequality and the Labour Market (B-KUL-D2M46b)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The exam is written and closed book. A pocket calculator can be used. Electronic devices or any device that has a connection with the outside world (mobiles, i-phones, tablets, laptops, ...) are not allowed.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS Managerial Aspects of European Integration (B-KUL-D0M57B)
Aims
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Explain the main aspects of the business environment that directly result from EU rule making;
- explain the functioning of the EU, its institutions and the consequences thereof for lobbying;
- develop strategies to deal with challenges and opportunities that arise from EU rule making;
- understand important EU policy domains - such as the internal market, environmental protection, competition policy and digital policy, to name just a few;
- use economic reasoning to explain the political, economic and managerial aspects of the EU.
Previous knowledge
While there are no formal prerequisites for this course, it helps if students are familiar with basic microeconomic concepts and theories. Prior knowledge about the EU is an asset too.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: International business) 60 ects.
- Master of Advanced Studies in European Policies and Public Administration (Leuven et al) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 2: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Managerial Aspects of European Integration (B-KUL-D0M57a)
Content
Content
The European Union (EU) is a regulatory superpower. Its regulations influence which products are built and how business is conducted, not just in the EU but worldwide. As such, managers and business leaders need to understand how the EU works and how it affects the business environment they operate in. This course contributes to that understanding by studying the managerial aspects of European integration.
Course material
Used course material:
*Course notes, taken during the lectures
*Slides and readings (more information on distribution can be found on Toledo)
Toledo:
*Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
The focus during the course sessions is on explaining the learning content. Students are expected to critically and thoroughly study the methods and models presented during the lectures.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Managerial Aspects of European Integration (B-KUL-D2M57b)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
The evaluation consists of:
- Class participation and preparation (10%). Students need to read chapters of books or articles prior to class. These materials will then be discussed during the classes.
- Written, closed book final exam (90%).
DETERMINATION OF THE FINAL GRADES
*The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- The final exam counts for 90% of the final grade
- Class participation and preparation counts for 10% of the final grade
*If the student does not participate in one of the partial evaluations of the permanent evalution, the grades for this partial evaluation will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
*If the student does not take the final exam, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken).
*Students need to obtain 10/20 or more on the final exam to pass the course. For students who obtain less, the grade on the final exam counts as the final grade for the course.
SECOND EXAM OPPORTUNITY
*At the second exam opportunity, the final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- Class participation and preparation: 10% of the final grade
- Final exam: 90% of the final grade
*Due to the nature of the class participation and preparation, students cannot retake this part of the evaluation. The results obtained at the first exam opportunity will therefore be transferred to the second exam opportunity
Information about retaking exams
See ‘Explanation’ for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Applied Game Theory and Economics of Information (B-KUL-D0M59B)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
Applied Game theory
- critically assess scientific research, using game theoretical models.
- apply game theory to bargaining, entry deterrence and repeated games.
- develop game-theoretical models.
Economics of Information
- provide an overview of the principal solution concepts and applications of game theory, with a focus on situations with asymmetric information.
- critically assess existing scientific research.
- formulate research questions and conduct research independently.
- demonstrate team work and presentation skills
Previous knowledge
We recommend the following course units should be successfully completed:
Theory of Industrial Organization and/or Applied Industrial Organization
Is included in these courses of study
- Doctoral Programme in Business Economics (Leuven)
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: International business, strategie en innovatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Applied Game Theory (B-KUL-D0M59a)
Content
This course offers an overview of the principal solution concepts and applications of game theory. Game theory is used in the social sciences to analyze strategic interactions in a variety of contexts. The actions taken by others, competitors, buyers, suppliers, regulators and such, affect companies' market and non-market opportunities. When making decisions companies thus need to anticipate the actions taken by others. Game theory is the methodological tool best suited at analyzing such interactions. The course consists of two parts. First, it introduces the principal solution concepts used in game theoretical models: the Nash equilibrium concept, sub-game perfection, and sequential equilibria. Next, it studies applications of game theory in a number of areas, such as bargaining, signaling, spatial models. Both static and dynamic settings are analyzed.
Course material
Required reading:
- Reader: Kreps, A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Chapters 11-15, Ekonomika.
- Additional course material (such as slides, homework) is distributed via Toledo.
Toledo:
- Toledo is being used for this learning activitity.
Format: more information
The teaching philosophy for this course is partly based on lectures and partly based on active discussion in class. For this purpose, students need to make an assignment before each class. Each class consists then of two parts. In the first part, the assignment is discussed. In the second part, a particular concept or application of game theory is explained and applied by means of exercises.
Is also included in other courses
Economics of Information (B-KUL-D0M91a)
Content
The area of information economics has been a rapidly growing area in economics in the last decades. Most of what the module studies involves situations of asymmetric information, that is, situations where one economic agent knows something that another economic agent doesn't. For example, a worker might have a better idea of his capabilities than his employer does, managers know more about investment prospects than stockholders or investors. This asymmetric information typically leads to economic inefficiencies. Two situations are distinguished: moral hazard (a situation where the information on actions to be taken by the agent is asymmetrically distributed) and adverse selection (a situation when the information on types/characteristics is asymmetrically distributed). Solutions to these problems, like incentive contracts, are extensively being investigated in the literature. Also the best informed agent could try to signal this information before the contract is signed (signalling) or after the contract is signed (screening). In a dynamic setting, when current player's action determine future player's beliefs, reputation building scenarios can be developed. Many applications exist in IO, management, finance, accounting, insurance and marketing.
Course material
Required reading:
- Textbook: Perez-Castrillo & Macho-Stadler, Economics of Information, Oxford University Press
- Additional course material (slides, articles,...) is distributed via Toledo.
Toledo:
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity.
Format: more information
The teaching philosophy for this course is partly based on lectures and partly based on active discussion in class. For this purpose, students need to make an assignment in teams before each class. Each class consists then of two parts. In the first part, a particular theory of economics of information is explained. In the second part, the assignment is discussed.
Is also included in other courses
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Applied Game Theory and Economics of Information (B-KUL-D2M59b)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The evaluation for this course consists of:
- Class participation and preparation: students need to make individual and group assignments before each class and these assignments will be discussed during the class
- A team paper
- A group presentation of the team paper in which each team member has to do an equal part of the presentation
- A written, open book exam.
*Deadlines will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Determination of grades
*The grades are determined by the lecturer, as announced via Toledo and the examination schedule. The result is computed and expressed as a whole number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- Class participation and preparation: 5% of the final grade
- Paper: 25% of the final grade
- Presentation: 25% of the final grade
- Exam: 45% of the final grade
* If the student does not participate at the exam, the final grade for the course will be NA (not taken). If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the other partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade for the course.
*If one of the set deadlines was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Second exam opportunity
*At the second exam opportunity, the final grade is a weighted score and consists of
- Class participation and preparation: 5% of the final grade
- Paper: 25% of the final grade
- Presentation: 25% of the final grade
- Exam: 45% of the final grade
*Due to the nature of the class participation and preparation, students cannot retake this part of the evaluation. The grade attained at the first examination opportunity will therefore be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
*Students who failed the exam but passed the paper and presentation, only need to retake the exam. The result for the paper and presentation obtained at the first exam opportunity will be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
*Students who passed the exam but failed the paper and/or presentation, only need to retake the paper and presentation (= correct the paper and present it again, both need to be done by the individual student). The result for the exam obtained at the first exam opportunity will be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
*Students who failed both the exam and the paper and/or presentation, need to retake both the exam and the paper and presentation (= correct the paper and present it again, both need to be done by the individual student).
ECTS Internship Project (B-KUL-D0N45A)
Aims
Learning outcomes:
L1. The student will gain a better understanding of the varying aspects inherent to a professional work environment (e.g. explore workplace conditions, the workplace culture, … ). Furthermore, the student will acquire relevant professional experience by active participation in formal functional activities of an organization, but also by becoming familiar with informal organizational interrelationships.
L2. The student is provided with opportunities for acquiring new understandings and perspectives on required core competencies and for strengthening theory to practice transfer. The student will integrate theoretical knowledge with practical experience and thereby grow in excellence within a particular discipline or area of expertise.
L3. The student is able to critically analyze and interpret new and complex information, define, formulate and apply solutions to emerging problems in a real-life situation, thereby relying on relevant theoretical and methodological strategies and models.
L4. The student is moreover familiar with the translation of experience-based information from practice settings into useful and transferable knowledge.
General competencies:
G1. Internships contribute to students’ career development and formation of a professional identity, resulting from obtaining a more tangible idea on future professional activities.
G2. The student is stimulated to engage in lifelong learning and is able to take responsibility for his/her own immediate employability (self-regulation skills). The student grows in confidence in abilities he/she possesses, becomes aware of his/her own strengths and learns to identify weaknesses that are subject to improvement.
G3. The student learns to develop or improve personal competencies required to function within a professional environment. A number of specific competencies that should be developed are listed (see Lombardo & Eichinger, 2011):
- The student is action oriented, identifies opportunities and is vigorous for the things he/she sees as challenging.
- The student is willing to learn (from others).
- The student is resilient and not easily taken aback by obstacles.
- The student regularly conducts a self-evaluation and holds timely discussions.
- The student exerts effort and is committed to meet the expectations and requirements of internal and external customers, considering all available information.
- The student is result oriented and makes good decisions based upon a mixture of analysis, experience and judgement (problem solving skills).
- The student quickly grasps the essence and the underlying structure of ideas, projects, proposals, ...
- The student clearly assigns responsibility for tasks and decisions.
- The student manages time, sets priorities and is able to plan and schedule his work.
Previous knowledge
The internship project must be consistent with the compulsory programme or the chosen major/minor.
The student is responsible for finding a valid internship position, thereby taking into account the requirements of both the respective company/ organization and the FEB.
The student, in consultation with the supervisor in the company, develops a project proposal prior to the start of the internship. This project proposal must be approved by the academic assessor who will also evaluate the final report and presentation. The profile and role of the academic assessor as well as the procedure to be followed for applying for this internship project are described on the FEB student portal.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of International Business (Brussels) (Track 1: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Internship Project (B-KUL-D0N45a)
Content
The internship project enables the student to apply the knowledge, insights and skills acquired during the study program in a real work situation and thus to develop further in a particular field. Moreover, confrontation with practice allows the student to acquire new, valuable and transferable knowledge.
In addition, active participation in formal and informal activities within an internship context provides the student with the opportunity to (further) develop his/her professional competences and also encourages him/her to reflect critically on his/her practical experiences, personal development and professional identity.
The student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Practical experience during the internship
Format: more information
The internship provides experience-based learning and self-reflection to the student.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Internship Project (B-KUL-D2N45a)
Explanation
The assessment of the internship project is based on the following three sources of information.
1. An internship report, evaluated by the academic assessor
2. A performance report, filled in by your supervisor in the company
3. A presentation or poster session, attended by a jury (academic assessor and the internship mentor in the company)
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
The student must pass each of the three components in order to successfully complete the internship project.
The result of the internship project is displayed as a pass/fail decision.
Information about retaking exams
Due to the nature of the partial evaluations, there is no possibility to retake the internship project in August/September for students who did not pass the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Internship Project (B-KUL-D0N46A)
Aims
Learning outcomes:
L1. The student will gain a better understanding of the varying aspects inherent to a professional work environment (e.g. explore workplace conditions, the workplace culture, … ). Furthermore, the student will acquire relevant professional experience by active participation in formal functional activities of an organization, but also by becoming familiar with informal organizational interrelationships.
L2. The student is provided with opportunities for acquiring new understandings and perspectives on required core competencies and for strengthening theory to practice transfer. The student will integrate theoretical knowledge with practical experience and thereby grow in excellence within a particular discipline or area of expertise.
L3. The student is able to critically analyze and interpret new and complex information, define, formulate and apply solutions to emerging problems in a real-life situation, thereby relying on relevant theoretical and methodological strategies and models.
L4. The student is moreover familiar with the translation of experience-based information from practice settings into useful and transferable knowledge.
General competencies:
G1. Internships contribute to students’ career development and formation of a professional identity, resulting from obtaining a more tangible idea on future professional activities.
G2. The student is stimulated to engage in lifelong learning and is able to take responsibility for his/her own immediate employability (self-regulation skills). The student grows in confidence in abilities he/she possesses, becomes aware of his/her own strengths and learns to identify weaknesses that are subject to improvement.
G3. The student learns to develop or improve personal competencies required to function within a professional environment. A number of specific competencies that should be developed are listed (see Lombardo & Eichinger, 2011):
- The student is action oriented, identifies opportunities and is vigorous for the things he/she sees as challenging.
- The student is willing to learn (from others).
- The student is resilient and not easily taken aback by obstacles.
- The student regularly conducts a self-evaluation and holds timely discussions.
- The student exerts effort and is committed to meet the expectations and requirements of internal and external customers, considering all available information.
- The student is result oriented and makes good decisions based upon a mixture of analysis, experience and judgement (problem solving skills).
- The student quickly grasps the essence and the underlying structure of ideas, projects, proposals, ...
- The student clearly assigns responsibility for tasks and decisions.
- The student manages time, sets priorities and is able to plan and schedule his work.
Previous knowledge
The internship project must be consistent with the compulsory programme or the chosen major/minor.
The student is responsible for finding a valid internship position, thereby taking into account the requirements of both the respective company/ organization and the FEB.
The student, in consultation with the supervisor in the company, develops a project proposal prior to the start of the internship. This project proposal must be approved by the academic assessor who will also evaluate the final report and presentation. The profile and role of the academic assessor as well as the procedure to be followed for applying for this internship project are described on the FEB student portal.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of International Business (Brussels) (Track 1: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Internship Project (B-KUL-D0N46a)
Content
The internship project enables the student to apply the knowledge, insights and skills acquired during the study program in a real work situation and thus to develop further in a particular field. Moreover, confrontation with practice allows the student to acquire new, valuable and transferable knowledge.
In addition, active participation in formal and informal activities within an internship context provides the student with the opportunity to (further) develop his/her professional competences and also encourages him/her to reflect critically on his/her practical experiences, personal development and professional identity.
The student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Practical experience during the internship
Format: more information
The internship provides experience-based learning and self-reflection to the student.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Internship Project (B-KUL-D2N46a)
Explanation
The assessment of the internship project is based on the following three sources of information.
1. An internship report, evaluated by the academic assessor
2. A performance report, filled in by your supervisor in the company
3. A presentation or poster session, attended by a jury (academic assessor and the internship mentor in the company)
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
The student must pass each of the three components in order to successfully complete the internship project.
The result of the internship project is displayed as a pass/fail decision.
Information about retaking exams
Due to the nature of the partial evaluations, there is no possibility to retake the internship project in August/September for students who did not pass the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Research Project @FEB (B-KUL-D0N47A)
Aims
Learning outcomes:
L1. The student can independently develop a research design and methodologically address the research question using a structured analysis plan (e.g. creating a hypothesis, planning and conducting experiments, processing the data, interpretation of the results).
L2. The student can make quantitatively and qualitatively well-informed decisions, thereby relying on selected research methods and techniques.
L3. The student can evaluate his findings with existing knowledge, and develops creative and innovative solutions to overcome possible drawbacks.
L4. The student demonstrates critical reflection on the collected information, performed research and results and hereby relies on a theoretical founded argumentation and personal critical analysis.
L5. The student can report about the set-up and the results of his research, at an academic level, in both writing and orally.
General competencies:
G1. Internships contribute to students’ career development and formation of a professional identity, resulting from obtaining a more tangible idea on future professional activities.
G2. The student is stimulated to engage in lifelong learning and is able to take responsibility for his/her own immediate employability (self-regulation skills). The student grows in confidence in abilities he/she possesses, becomes aware of his/her own strengths and learns to identify weaknesses that are subject to improvement.
G3. The student learns to develop or improve personal competencies required to function within a professional environment. A number of specific competencies that should be developed are listed (see Lombardo & Eichinger, 2011):
The student is action oriented, identifies opportunities and is vigorous for the things he/she sees as challenging.
The student is willing to learn (from others).
The student is resilient and not easily taken aback by obstacles.
The student regularly conducts a self-evaluation and holds timely discussions.
The student easily makes connections among previously unrelated notions.
The student exerts effort and is committed to meet the expectations and requirements of internal and external customers, considering all available information.
The student is result oriented and makes good decisions based upon a mixture of analysis, experience and judgement (problem solving skills).
The student quickly grasps the essence and the underlying structure of ideas, projects, proposals, ...
The student clearly assigns responsibility for tasks and decisions.
The student manages time, sets priorities and is able to plan and schedule his work.
Previous knowledge
For students with a Bachelor’s degree from the Flemish community, only students who have obtained a score of at least 68% (‘Distinction’) in their Bachelor are eligible for a ‘Research project @ FEB’.
Students with a bachelor's degree from outside the Flemish Community must submit a motivated application (including a motivation letter, CV and transcripts) via the FEBcoördinator. This may be followed by a short selection interview with the academic assessor.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Research Project @FEB (B-KUL-D0N47a)
Content
The 'Research Project @ FEB' offers students the opportunity to participate intensively in ongoing research projects within one of FEB's research groups. The student is thereby encouraged to actively think about the design and methods of the research and to make critical and original contributions within a specific research domain.
The student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Research experience during the internship.
Format: more information
The research project provides experience-based learning and self-reflection to the student.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Research Project @FEB (B-KUL-D2N47a)
Explanation
The evaluation of the Research Project @ FEB is based on three sources of information, and a combined score is obtained from the three evaluations.
1. A final report about the set-up and the results of the research. This score accounts for 60% of the total combined score (according to a ratio of 80% for the content and 20% for the format).
2. The daily performance of the student in the context of the research unit. This score accounts for 20% of the total combined score (process evaluation).
3. An oral presentation for 20% of the total combined score.
The deadline for the submission of the research report and the date of the defence are determined by mutual agreement between the student and the academic evaluator
Information about retaking exams
* The evaluation characteristics and/or the determination of the final result of the second examination opportunity differs from those of the first examination opportunity.
* For the second examination opportunity, a new form of evaluation is determined by mutual agreement between the academic evaluator, the faculty internship coordinator and the student.
ECTS Research Project @FEB (B-KUL-D0N48A)
Aims
Learning outcomes:
L1. The student can independently develop a research design and methodologically address the research question using a structured analysis plan (e.g. creating a hypothesis, planning and conducting experiments, processing the data, interpretation of the results).
L2. The student can make quantitatively and qualitatively well-informed decisions, thereby relying on selected research methods and techniques.
L3. The student can evaluate his findings with existing knowledge, and develops creative and innovative solutions to overcome possible drawbacks.
L4. The student demonstrates critical reflection on the collected information, performed research and results and hereby relies on a theoretical founded argumentation and personal critical analysis.
L5. The student can report about the set-up and the results of his research, at an academic level, in both writing and orally.
General competencies:
G1. Internships contribute to students’ career development and formation of a professional identity, resulting from obtaining a more tangible idea on future professional activities.
G2. The student is stimulated to engage in lifelong learning and is able to take responsibility for his/her own immediate employability (self-regulation skills). The student grows in confidence in abilities he/she possesses, becomes aware of his/her own strengths and learns to identify weaknesses that are subject to improvement.
G3. The student learns to develop or improve personal competencies required to function within a professional environment. A number of specific competencies that should be developed are listed (see Lombardo & Eichinger, 2011):
The student is action oriented, identifies opportunities and is vigorous for the things he/she sees as challenging.
The student is willing to learn (from others).
The student is resilient and not easily taken aback by obstacles.
The student regularly conducts a self-evaluation and holds timely discussions.
The student easily makes connections among previously unrelated notions.
The student exerts effort and is committed to meet the expectations and requirements of internal and external customers, considering all available information.
The student is result oriented and makes good decisions based upon a mixture of analysis, experience and judgement (problem solving skills).
The student quickly grasps the essence and the underlying structure of ideas, projects, proposals, ...
The student clearly assigns responsibility for tasks and decisions.
The student manages time, sets priorities and is able to plan and schedule his work.
Previous knowledge
For students with a Bachelor’s degree from the Flemish community, only students who have obtained a score of at least 68% (‘Distinction’) in their Bachelor are eligible for a ‘Research project @ FEB’.
Students with a bachelor's degree from outside the Flemish Community must submit a motivated application (including a motivation letter, CV and transcripts) via the FEBcoördinator. This may be followed by a short selection interview with the academic assessor.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Research Project @FEB (B-KUL-D0N48a)
Content
The 'Research Project @ FEB' offers students the opportunity to participate intensively in ongoing research projects within one of FEB's research groups. The student is thereby encouraged to actively think about the design and methods of the research and to make critical and original contributions within a specific research domain.
The student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Research experience during the internship.
Format: more information
The research project provides experience-based learning and self-reflection to the student.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Research Project @FEB (B-KUL-D2N48a)
Explanation
The evaluation of the Research Project @ FEB is based on three sources of information, and a combined score is obtained from the three evaluations.
1. A final report about the set-up and the results of the research. This score accounts for 60% of the total combined score (according to a ratio of 80% for the content and 20% for the format).
2. The daily performance of the student in the context of the research unit. This score accounts for 20% of the total combined score (process evaluation).
3. An oral presentation for 20% of the total combined score.
The deadline for the submission of the research report and the date of the defence are determined by mutual agreement between the student and the academic evaluator
Information about retaking exams
* The evaluation characteristics and/or the determination of the final result of the second examination opportunity differs from those of the first examination opportunity.
* For the second examination opportunity, a new form of evaluation is determined by mutual agreement between the academic evaluator, the faculty internship coordinator and the student.
ECTS Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N49A)
Aims
The student gains insight into a subject within the field of Economics and Business by means of participation in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school) which is approved by the International office @FEB.
More information on summer schools: https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools.
Previous knowledge
No specific previous knowledge required.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N49a)
Content
Content varies according to the course(s) taken in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school).
For more information on summer schools https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D2N49a)
Explanation
This course will be evaluated according to the rules and regulations of the host institution that organizes the short training initiative (e.g. summer school). KU Leuven will not transfer the results obtained at this institution, however the student will receive a pass/fail score for the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' if he/she obtained the necessary credits for the short training initiative.
The short training initiative can only be validated in this way upon approval by the International Office @FEB.
The student registers the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' in his/her ISP in the academic year directly following the short training initiative.
Information about retaking exams
ECTS Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N50A)
Aims
The student gains insight into a subject within the field of Economics and Business by means of participation in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school) which is approved by the International office @FEB.
More information on summer schools: https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools
Previous knowledge
No specific previous knowledge required.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N50a)
Content
Content varies according to the course(s) taken in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school).
For more information on summer schools https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D2N50a)
Explanation
This course will be evaluated according to the rules and regulations of the host institution that organizes the short training initiative (e.g. summer school). KU Leuven will not transfer the results obtained at this institution, however the student will receive a pass/fail score for the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' if he/she obtained the necessary credits for the short training initiative.
The short training initiative can only be validated in this way upon approval by the International Office @FEB.
The student registers the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' in his/her ISP in the academic year directly following the short training initiative.
Information about retaking exams
ECTS Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N65A)
Aims
The student gains insight into a subject within the field of Economics and Business by means of participation in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school) which is approved by the International office @FEB.
More information on summer schools: https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools
Previous knowledge
No specific previous knowledge required.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N65a)
Content
Content varies according to the course(s) taken in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school).
For more information on summer schools https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D2N65a)
Explanation
This course will be evaluated according to the rules and regulations of the host institution that organizes the short training initiative (e.g. summer school). KU Leuven will not transfer the results obtained at this institution, however the student will receive a pass/fail score for the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' if he/she obtained the necessary credits for the short training initiative.
The short training initiative can only be validated in this way upon approval by the International Office @FEB.
The student registers the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' in his/her ISP in the academic year directly following the short training initiative.
Information about retaking exams
ECTS Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N67A)
Aims
The student gains insight into a subject within the field of Economics and Business by means of participation in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school) which is approved by the International office @FEB.
More information on summer schools: https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools
Previous knowledge
No specific previous knowledge required.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D0N67a)
Content
Content varies according to the course(s) taken in a short training initiative (e.g. summer school).
For more information on summer schools https://feb.kuleuven.be/eng/international/going-abroad/summer-schools
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Short Mobility Economics and Business (Core Masters) (B-KUL-D2N67a)
Explanation
This course will be evaluated according to the rules and regulations of the host institution that organizes the short training initiative (e.g. summer school). KU Leuven will not transfer the results obtained at this institution, however the student will receive a pass/fail score for the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' if he/she obtained the necessary credits for the short training initiative.
The short training initiative can only be validated in this way upon approval by the International Office @FEB.
The student registers the course 'Short Mobility Economics and Business' in his/her ISP in the academic year directly following the short training initiative.
Information about retaking exams
ECTS Governance (B-KUL-D0N73A)
Aims
This course aims to learn students what a well governed firm is and how governance contributes to long term value creation. After having followed this course, students should be able to discuss the main reasons why governance is relevant , what the main instruments are (e.g. board of directors, committees,…), knowing the institutional framework related to governance in a Belgian and international context.
* present their own findings and conclusions for an audience of specialists
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, students are familiar with the contents of the following courses:
Accountancy and financial statement analysis
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2024-2025 in de master en/of in het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart in de master in 2024-2025 of later, en voor studenten gestart in de master en/of het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma vóór 2024-2025 indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Governance (B-KUL-D0N73a)
Content
First, the concept of corporate governance is outlined as well as the relevance of governance for firm performance and long term value creation are explained. Not only financial performance, but also to aspects of business ethics are discussed.
Second, the various possible governance mechanisms are explained. The specific roles of the different governance mechanisms are addressed: the board, the different possible committees (audit committee, renumeration committee, governance committee), the role of the CEO (executive compensation), the role of the external auditor in the governance landscape. Furthermore, the impact of the ownership structure is studied.
Finally, the legal framework of corporate governance is discussed in both Anglo-Saxon and in European and Belgian contexts and the different requirements for listed companies (financial and non-financial companies) and non-listed companies are discussed.
Course material
Articles and literature
Preparatory material
Toledo
Format: more information
Prior to the practical case studies, guest speakers (including accounting firms) are invited who were involved in the supervision of these operations in order to explain the practical side of it.
Is also included in other courses
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Governance (B-KUL-D2N73a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The written exam is a closed book exam consisting of open questions.
Determination of final grades
*The grades are determined by the lecturer, in line with the examination regulations and as communicated via Toledo.
*The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are identical to those of the first examination opportunity, as described in the tab 'Explanation'.
ECTS Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (B-KUL-D0N75A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student:
- Is able to apply the acquired knowledge and expertise to have (social) impact in a purposeful and durable way.
- Has gained insight into various aspects inherent to a project-based organizational structure.
- Has grown in a number of meta-cognitive skills (e.g. professional communication; presentation skills; working effectively in a team; negotiating, ...).
Previous knowledge
The student is responsible for finding a project via student organizations AFC, AFD, Humasol or KU Leuven KICK. The student must take into account the prerequisites that are formulated by the project manager.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of International Business (Brussels) (Track 1: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (B-KUL-D0N75a)
Content
Students gain experience with various aspects of entrepreneurship and develop professional skills by participating in consulting and implementation projects.
The student is responsible for finding a project via student organizations AFC, AFD, Humasol or KU Leuven KICK.
Once he/she is selected by the organization, the student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Practical experience.
Format: more information
Work out and/or implement creative and high-quality projects for a startup, (non-profit) organization, SME, large company, NGO, ... These projects have a duration of one semester to one year and are carried out in teams of 3 to 5 students.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (B-KUL-D2N75a)
Explanation
The grading scale of this course unit is pass/fail.
More concretely, a contribution to a consultancy project is assessed on the basis of:
1. an individual reflection paper of the student in which the most important personal findings and realizations within the framework of the project are presented.
2. the daily functioning, assessed by the project coordinator of the team.
3. the final report (paper, presentation, ...) to the client. This assessment is also determined by the company/organization for which the consultancy project is carried out.
If the student repeatedly or seriously fails to meet the obligations stated in the project proposal, participation in the project work may be terminated and the final assessment for the course unit will be NA (not taken).
Information about retaking exams
Due to the nature of the evaluation, there is no possibility to re-examine the project (August/September) for students who did not pass the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Introduction to Auditing and International Auditing Standards (B-KUL-D0N77A)
Aims
After completing D0R92A Introduction to Auditing, students will be able to:
- Explain what triggers the need for financial statement auditing in the economy and for society
- Describe the basics of the financial statement audit process
- Describe the major audit objectives
- Describe the key concepts of audit process planning: materiality and audit risk
- Describe different types of audit opinions and their limitations
- Discuss the basic characteristics of the auditing profession in Belgium and in an international setting
After completing D0N76a International Auditing Standards, students will be able to:
- Describe the quality control procedures necessary to ensure that a competent audit or review engagement is performed
- Discuss the overall objectives of an audit and the prerequisites to meet these objectives
- Describe the process to accept/continue with an audit engagement and explain the importance/content of an audit engagement letter
- Describe the purposes and contents of good audit documentation
- Discuss the nature and importance of the communication process with those charged with governance
- Understand the audit and assurance process, beginning with gaining an understanding of the client and its associated business risks, followed by the assessment of controls to manage, mitigate or share those risks, followed again by the development of an audit program of tests of control and substantive tests and ending in the communication of the results to the shareholders
- Discuss auditors’ and directors’ responsibilities for the detection of fraud and identify the fraud risk factors in an engagement.
- Differentiate between different audit tests and procedures, know when they are appropriate and what factors might influence their quality
- Understand the use and importance of management representation letters
- Describe the auditor’s responsibilities when facts are discovered after the issuance of the audit report.
- Point out what is required in using the work of internal auditors/experts and understand the auditor’s responsibility in using their work
- Distinguish between the different types of opinions given in audit reports and describe/recognize the circumstances which may result in modified audit opinions
Previous knowledge
D0E16A Accountancy of D0T07A Accountancy (TEW) of D0H13A Accountancy (HIR)
D0T13A Corporate financial reporting (TEW) of D0H23A Corporate financial reporting (HIR)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en auditing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 127 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
International Auditing Standards (B-KUL-D0N76a)
Content
The objective of this course is to gain a thorough understanding and knowledge of the International Standards on Auditing. After an introduction of the ISA framework, the following topics will be discussed:
- Quality control (ISQC 1, ISA 220);
- General principles and responsibilities (ISA 200, 210, 230, 260);
- Assessing the risk of fraud (ISA 240);
- Planning the audit and risk assessment (ISA 300, 315, 330);
- Risk response and audit procedures (ISA 500, 501, 505, 520, 530, 540, 560);
- Using the work of others and concluding the audit (ISA 610, 620, 570, 580);
- Reporting (ISA 700, 705, 706)
Course material
Uses course material:
* Toledo is being used for this learning activity to disseminate the course material, consisting of lecture slides and readings
Format: more information
During class the ISA’s will be discussed and illustrated using practice examples and exercises (or cases).
Is also included in other courses
Introduction to Auditing (B-KUL-D0R92a)
Content
- The role/value of auditing in the economy
- The financial statement auditing process
- The major auditing objectives and their link with managerial assertions regarding corporate financial information
- Audit process planning: materiality and audit risk
- Audit reporting: different types of audit opinions and their limitations
- The auditing profession in Belgium and internationally
Course material
Toledo is used for this learning activity to disseminate the course material, consisting of lecture slides and readings
Format: more information
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Introduction to Auditing and International Auditing Standards (B-KUL-D2N77a)
Explanation
Evaluation features
* The exam is written and closed book.
* The deadline for handing in the assignments will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo
Determining the result
- The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
- The final grade is a weighted score. Both parts of the course will count for 10 points of the final grade.
- For ‘Introduction to Auditing’, the assignments are graded and count for 15% of the final grade, the final exam counts for the other 85%.
- If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
- If the set deadline was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Retake
- The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are identical to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
- Due to the nature of the assignment/paper, the grade attained at the first examination opportunity will be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
Information about retaking exams
See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (B-KUL-D0N78A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student:
- Is able to apply the acquired knowledge and expertise to have (social) impact in a purposeful and durable way.
- Has gained insight into various aspects inherent to a project-based organizational structure.
- Has grown in a number of meta-cognitive skills (e.g. professional communication; presentation skills; working effectively in a team; negotiating, ...).
Previous knowledge
The student is responsible for finding a project via student organizations AFC, AFD, Humasol or KU Leuven KICK. The student must take into account the prerequisites that are formulated by the project manager.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Information systems engineering en management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Information Systems Engineering and Management) 120 ects.
- Master of International Business (Brussels) (Track 1: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (B-KUL-D0N78a)
Content
Students gain experience with various aspects of entrepreneurship and develop professional skills by participating in consulting and implementation projects.
The student is responsible for finding a project via student organizations AFC, AFD, Humasol or KU Leuven KICK.
Once he/she is selected by the organization, the student follows the procedure for internship applications mentioned on the FEB student portal.
Only upon approval of the internship coordinator and Education & Students Services Department, the student can validate the internship in the individual study programme.
More information can be found on the FEB student portal.
Course material
Practical experience.
Format: more information
Work out and/or implement creative and high-quality projects for a startup, (non-profit) organization, SME, large company, NGO, ... These projects have a duration of one semester to one year and are carried out in teams of 3 to 5 students.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Integrated Business Project/ Social Profit Project (B-KUL-D2N78a)
Explanation
The grading scale of this course unit is pass/fail.
More concretely, a contribution to a consultancy project is assessed on the basis of:
1. an individual reflection paper of the student in which the most important personal findings and realizations within the framework of the project are presented.
2. the daily functioning, assessed by the project coordinator of the team.
3. the final report (paper, presentation, ...) to the client. This assessment is also determined by the company/organization for which the consultancy project is carried out.
If the student repeatedly or seriously fails to meet the obligations stated in the project proposal, participation in the project work may be terminated and the final assessment for the course unit will be NA (not taken).
Information about retaking exams
Due to the nature of the evaluation, there is no possibility to re-examine the project (August/September) for students who did not pass the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Master's Thesis Financial Economics (B-KUL-D0O34A)
Aims
Learning outcomes are evaluated for the master’s thesis in the field of the selected programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The student purposefully collects and selects relevant information from the scientific literature.
- The student reflects critically on (findings from) existing research.
- The student integrates information from existing research in function of the question.
- The student presents the described scientific findings correctly.
- The student refers adequately to sources used, both in the text and in the reference list.
- The student formulates clear and defined research questions and indicates their relevance.
- The student draws out a meaningful, feasible and verifiable research design with appropriate research methods and analysis techniques.
- The student motivates the methodological choices made.
- The student carries out the research design consistently.
- The student provides a clear, accurate description of the results.
- The student formulates an answer to the research questions.
- The student reflects critically on the own research, links back to findings from previous research and formulates suggestions for further research, for practice or for the government.
- The student reports, both orally and in writing, in a clear and correct manner on the research conducted.
- The student takes initiative, works independently and conscientiously on the master's thesis.
- The student deals constructively with the feedback obtained
Previous knowledge
The master's thesis can only be selected if the master's programme can be completed in the same academic year. The student may be granted permission to deviate from this general rule upon reasoned request and after advice from the study career consultant.
Identical courses
D0O81A: Masterproef financiële economie (TEW)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 3: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Master's Thesis Financial Economics (B-KUL-D0O34a)
Content
The master's thesis aims to have students conduct and report (both written and oral) a scientific research project. The student works independently (individually or in group) but under the supervision of a supervisor.
The following general rules apply with regard to the subject of the master's thesis:
- The topic is consistent with the field of study of the programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The research assignment should be in line with the research or areas of specialisation of the supervisor (who supervises the approach and completion of the work).
- In developing their research, students have the opportunity to collaborate with the field (but this is not guaranteed for every topic or with every supervisor).
Course material
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity
Compulsory study material
The compulsory study material depends on the chosen topic for the master's thesis and can be discussed with the supervisor.
Additional recommended study material
The optional study material depends on the topic chosen for the master's thesis and is to be discussed with the supervisor. Students should make use of relevant scientific articles and literature that they search for themselves via e.g. electronic databases (e.g. LIMO or Google Scholar).
Format: more information
The master's thesis consists of two components:
- Writing a scientific article
- Oral defense of the master’s thesis
With this ECTS file there are supplementary master’s thesis regulations. Students are required to take note of these Regulations and appendices: everything is available online on the FEB master's thesis portal. If there are interim additions, announcements and/or updates during the academic year itself, these will be communicated to students via Toledo.
Points of Attention:
- Possible promoters, topics and information on how to choose them will be made available at the start of the academic year or in the 2nd semester (depending on the programme). If necessary, students may submit their own topics.
- Students who re-register for the ‘Master's thesis’ never automatically transfer their choice of subject and supervisor at that time. In principle, with the written agreement of the supervisor, the started master's thesis will be continued. These students make this known no later than the start of the academic year. The procedure for making this known will be communicated at the start of the academic year.
- Students moving abroad as part of their master's thesis must give at least 2 weeks' written notice. See FEB master's thesis portal for the procedure. If the planned itinerary and dates change afterwards or during the trip, this must be communicated again.
- Students can work on the master's thesis in groups or individually. More information can be found on the FEB master’s thesis portal.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Master's Thesis Financial Economics (B-KUL-D2O34a)
Explanation
Evaluation Features
In order to successfully complete the course unit Master’s Thesis the student must fulfil the conditions listed below in a timely manner (see deadlines and procedures on the FEB master’s thesis portal):
- be fully in order with the choice and (re)start of the master’s thesis with a supervisor, incl. any project administration
- register for the oral defense (or apply for an early graduation);
- submit the master’s thesis and related documents via KU Loket (in case of group cooperation, specific guidelines apply);
- be available on campus on the scheduled defense dates. The student will receive a call no later than 1 week before the defense date with details about the specific defense time.
Only for weighty reasons (proven force majeure) can the Ombuds Service grant exceptions to the above conditions and corresponding deadlines.
Determination of final result
The evaluation of the master's thesis is based on various aspects (see Master's thesis regulations on the FEB master's thesis portal):
- Each master's thesis is assessed before the oral defence by an assessment committee using the table of assessment criteria (see FEB master's thesis portal).
- The student defends the master's thesis orally before an assessment committee and is assessed on this defence.
- The final score on the master's thesis is calculated as follows: paper (70%), defence/presentation paper (20%), attitude during the master's thesis process (10%)
- The student must be at least successful on the paper to pass the master's thesis.
- If the student is not successful on the paper, the grade of the paper is the final score for the master's thesis.
- To receive a final score, all evaluation activities must be taken. When the master's thesis is not submitted or submitted late or when the student is not present at the defence, the final score is ‘NA’ (=not taken).
- For sanctions regarding the non-submission or late submission of other compulsory documents, please refer to the FEB Master's thesis portal.
Information about retaking exams
The evaluation at the 2nd examination opportunity takes place in the same way as at the 1st examination opportunity. For master's theses involving group collaboration, the supervision team determines the reworking of the master's thesis.
ECTS Entrepreneurship and New Business Development (B-KUL-D0O37A)
Aims
This course offers a bird's-eye view of the entrepreneurial process, exploring how opportunities are transformed into value-creating economic activities. It aims to enhance understanding of the how, where, when, who, and why behind entrepreneurial initiatives.
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Explain and illustrate the unique qualities of the entrepreneurial process;
- Understand the role that business planning may have on the entrepreneurial process;
- Understand the significance and dangers of business plan writing;
- Appreciate the different purposes and audiences for business plans;
- Evaluate the attractiveness of product and service ideas;
- Evaluate the feasibility of business models;
- Retrieve (sufficiently reliable) primary data as input to a business planning process;
- Apprehend the essential components of effective business plans;
- Develop and evaluate a sophisticated business plan for an identified or given opportunity;
- Adequately present a business idea.
Previous knowledge
This course does not assume that you have taken prior classes on entrepreneurship or business administration. However, it would help if you have a rudimentary understanding of how organizations operate. Actually, students who have already taken management or business courses may come to realize that the entrepreneurial building of new business is quite distinct from more generic business management.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: biosysteemtechniek (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de communicatiewetenschappen (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting media, cultuur en beleid) 60 ects.
- Master in de communicatiewetenschappen (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting mediapsychologie) 60 ects.
- Master in de communicatiewetenschappen (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting strategie en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master of Philosophy (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: landbouwkunde (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master in de revalidatiewetenschappen en de kinesitherapie (Leuven e.a.) (Afstudeerrichting Geestelijke gezondheidszorg) 120 ects.
- Master in de revalidatiewetenschappen en de kinesitherapie (Leuven e.a.) (Afstudeerrichting Inwendige aandoeningen) 120 ects.
- Master in de revalidatiewetenschappen en de kinesitherapie (Leuven e.a.) (Afstudeerrichting Kinderen) 120 ects.
- Master in de revalidatiewetenschappen en de kinesitherapie (Leuven e.a.) (Afstudeerrichting Musculoskeletale aandoeningen: optie manuele therapie) 120 ects.
- Master in de revalidatiewetenschappen en de kinesitherapie (Leuven e.a.) (Afstudeerrichting Neurologische aandoeningen) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 3: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: milieutechnologie (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master in het toerisme (Leuven e.a.) 60 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: landbeheer (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Human Health Engineering (Leuven) (Thematic Minor: Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Research Master: Master of Advanced Studies in Theology and Religion (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: levensmiddelenwetenschappen en voeding (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Theology and Religious Studies (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de theologie en de religiewetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de biologie (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Biology (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Children) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Internal Disorders) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Mental Health Care) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Musculoskeletal Disorders: Option Manual Therapy) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Neurological Disorders) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Research Master of Philosophy (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Mobility and Supply Chain Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master in de farmaceutische zorg (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master in de geneesmiddelenontwikkeling (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: katalytische technologie (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Agro- and Ecosystems Engineering (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Cellular and Genetic Engineering (Leuven) (Thematic minor: Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de geografie (Leuven e.a.) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Entrepreneurship: Models and Ingredients (B-KUL-D0O39a)
Content
This component is designed to immerse students in the theory of entrepreneurship and new venture creation and address the trepidations of students who may consider becoming entrepreneurs at some point in their career.
Topics Covered in this Course:
- Entrepreneurship intro, idea generation;
- Feasibility study, business plan guidelines;
- Industry analysis, market analysis;
- Industry segmentation, target market selection;
- Marketing plan, business positioning;
- Team development;
- Operations, product development plan;
- Getting funding, financial statements.
Course material
Used Course Material:
- Barringer, B.R. & Ireland, R.D. (2012). Entrepreneurship: Successfully launching new ventures (4th edition). Harlow: Pearson Education Limited;
- Barringer, B.R. (2008). Preparing effective business plans: An entrepreneurial approach. Upper Saddle River (NJ): Prentice Hall;
- Jones-Evans, D. & Carter, S. (2012). Enterprise and small business: Principles, practice and policy (3rd edition). Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.
Recommended Reading:
- Debrulle, J., & Maes, J. (2014). The act of creating new value: Positioning the independent and corporate entrepreneurship domain. London: McGraw-Hill, available at: https://create.mheducation.com/shop/#/catalog/details/?isbn=9781308118390.
Toledo:
- Toledo is being used to share all necessary readings and lecture slides.
Language of instruction: more information
This course is taught in English.
Format: more information
Students interactively acquire in-depth and advanced insights into the entrepreneurial process in a course that combines traditional lectures (Models and Ingredients) with a demanding field project (Development of a Business Plan).
Is also included in other courses
D0S18A : Technology Entrepreneurship and New Business Development
Entrepreneurship: Development of a Business Plan (B-KUL-D0O64a)
Content
For this component, students participate in a group-based business plan writing exercise, accompanied by presentations on their group's progress.
Topics Covered in this Course:
- Idea generation and feasibility study;
- Industry analysis, market analysis;
- Industry segmentation, target market selection;
- Marketing plan, business positioning;
- Team development;
- Operations, product development plan;
- Getting funding, financial statements.
Course material
Used Course Material:
- Barringer, B.R. & Ireland, R.D. (2012). Entrepreneurship: Successfully launching new ventures (4th edition). Harlow: Pearson Education Limited;
- Barringer, B.R. (2008). Preparing effective business plans: An entrepreneurial approach. Upper Saddle River (NJ): Prentice Hall;
- Jones-Evans, D. & Carter, S. (2012). Enterprise and small business: Principles, practice and policy (3rd edition). Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.
Toledo:
- Toledo is being used to share all necessary readings, lecture slides, presentation guidelines, submit work, etc.
Language of instruction: more information
This course is taught in English. All presentations are delivered in English.
Format: more information
Presentation - Project work
This course provides you with a profound understanding of the role, analytics, and process of business plan writing. Following the lectures ("Models and Ingredients"), students will engage in a group-based business-planning project and accompanying presentations. You will learn how to rigorously prepare for starting up a new business. As part of a small (approximately 6 students) and diverse team, you will develop an operational business plan aimed at either the creation of a new venture (NVC-track) or the development of new business for an established small to medium-sized firm (NBD-track). You will engage in all steps of the entrepreneurial decision-making process (e.g., idea generation, feasibility analysis, industry study, market analysis, marketing plan, production plan, product development, and financial statements). Participants are expected to accumulate entrepreneurial knowledge and behaviors that support creative solutions and new value development.
The business plan is the most demanding course component. It is in the business plan that you can show what you have learned from the course. It requires extensive field research, creativity, and critical thinking.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Entrepreneurship and New Business Development (B-KUL-D2O37a)
Explanation
Features of the Evaluation:
- A written exam assesses the extent to which the student has internalized the key insights from the course material that were studied to prepare for the lectures and that will be applied in the business plan. Questions will be in the format of single-answer, multiple-choice, with correction for guessing. Further details about the grading of the multiple-choice questions will be explained during the lectures and can be found on the Toledo page;
- The course involves the full development of an operational business plan as well as multiple intermediate presentations throughout the year;
- The business plan and presentations should reflect that you can adequately apply the different entrepreneurial concepts presented in class;
- Upon completion of the business plan, students have to indicate the extent to which their team members (peers) have contributed to the final result of the manuscript and its presentations (= peer assessment);
- For the business plan exercise, the terms of delivery and deadlines will be determined by the lecturer (titularis) and communicated via the Toledo page;
- The date of the (final) business plan presentation(s) will be determined by the lecturer (titularis) and communicated via the Toledo page. The presentations will take place before the examination period.
Determination of the Final Grades:
- The grades are determined by the lecturer (titularis) as communicated via the Toledo page and stated in the examination schedule. The final grade is calculated and communicated as an integer on a scale of 20;
- The final grade is a weighted score and consists of the following components:
- 30% on a written closed-book exam in the form of multiple-choice questions, organized in the January examination period (with correction for guessing);
- 50% on the final business plan;
- 20% on the business plan presentations.
- Peer evaluation may trigger a correction up to 20% of the grade of the business plan;
- If the set deadlines for the business plan exercise were not respected, the final grade will be “NA” (not taken) for the whole course;
- If the student does not participate in the development of the business plan, the final grade will be “NA” (not taken) for the whole course;
- If the student does not participate in the exam, the final grade will be “NA” (not taken) for the whole course;
- Student attendance and participation in the business plan presentations are required for successful completion of the whole course.
Second Examination Opportunity:
- At the second exam opportunity, the final grade is based on:
- 30% on a written closed-book exam in the form of multiple-choice questions (with correction for guessing);
- 50% on an individual assignment (for students who failed the business plan component);
- 20% on the business plan presentations.
- Students who passed the exam do not have to retake the exam. The grade obtained at the first exam opportunity will therefore be transferred to the second exam opportunity;
- Students who have passed the business plan cannot retake that component. For them, the results already obtained at the first exam opportunity will be transferred to the second exam opportunity;
- Students who failed the business plan, cannot retake the business plan exercise but are required to complete an individual, written assignment;
- Due to the nature of the business plan presentations, this part of the evaluation cannot be retaken. The grade obtained at the first exam opportunity for this part will therefore be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
Information about retaking exams
See ‘Explanation’ for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D0O40A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
• Define, clarify and assess what the key contributions to the academic field of entrepreneurship research have been by economics, psychologists, sociologists.
• Illustrate how the disciplinary perspectives can be combined into a more holistic understanding of the entrepreneurial process.
• Explain the methodological challenges, strengths and weaknesses that each of these perspectives faces in theorizing and studying the entrepreneurial process.
• Assess the merit of scholarly work and distill practical and theoretical implications from original research articles.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, students should have a basic knowledge in economics, business, sociology or psychology.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 3: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Educatieve master in de economie (Leuven) 90 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D0O40a)
Content
This course introduces you to the foundations of the academic field of entrepreneurship and new business venturing. You will review the implications of different answers that have been provided to three of the most fundamental questions in the field of entrepreneurship: [1] Who becomes an entrepreneur, [2] Why do they become entrepreneurs, and [3] How do they do it. Characteristic to the field of entrepreneurship is that valuable answers have been provided by economists, sociologists and psychologists. In this course you will explore the merit of these disciplinary answers to an inherently interdisciplinary filed.
As such, this course familiarizes you with seminal and contemporary contributions to the field and their practical implications. It allows you to judge advances in theory development, and to recognize (and position yourself in) the intellectual debates in our field.
Course material
The course will use an (e-)reader of scholarly papers that will be available through Toledo.
Format: more information
Interactive lectures in which the readings (that the students have studied PRIOR to class) are discussed, contrasted and integrated
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: The Foundations of Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D2O40a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
- The student will be evaluated on basis of a class assignment and a written closed book exam.
- The class assignment can consist of (group) presentations featuring the critical discussion of pre-assigned academic papers.
- The written exam is closed book and assesses the extent to which the student has internalized the key insights from the readings (i.e., the scholarly papers in the course pack and the assigned book chapters) that were studied to prepare for and discussed in the lectures. The exam may contain both open essay and multiple choice questions (for the latter a penalty correction for guessing might be applied).
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
- The grades are determined by the lecturer, as announced via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
- The final grade is a weighted score and consists of the following components:
- 25% on a class assignment
- 75% on a written, closed book exam
- If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
- If the student does not participate in the written exam, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken) for the whole course.
Information about retaking exams
SECOND EXAMINATION OPPORTUNITY
- The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
- When the student has to redo the class assignment, an alternative individual assignment will be provided.
ECTS Strategic IP Management (B-KUL-D0O43A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Understand and explain different types of IP
- Formulate closed IP strategies
- Formulate open IP strategies
- Build and leverage IP portfolios
- Perform patent landscaping analyses
- Build IP strategies for weak IPR environments
Previous knowledge
There is no specific prior knowledge required for this course.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: biosysteemtechniek (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: landbouwkunde (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 3: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: milieutechnologie (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: landbeheer (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Human Health Engineering (Leuven) (Thematic Minor: Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: levensmiddelenwetenschappen en voeding (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Physics (Leuven) (Option: Physics for Society) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master in de handelswetenschappen (dag + avond, programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2024-2025) (Brussel) 60 ects.
- Master in de bio-ingenieurswetenschappen: katalytische technologie (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Agro- and Ecosystems Engineering (Leuven) (Gerichte minor Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Master of Bioscience Engineering: Cellular and Genetic Engineering (Leuven) (Thematic minor: Entrepreneurship and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de handelswetenschappen (programma voor studenten gestart in 2024-2025 of later) (Brussel) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Strategic IP Management (B-KUL-D0O43a)
Content
In this course you learn how to develop defensive and offensive intellectual property (IP) strategies that support your business model(s) and competitive strategy. You develop an understanding of the different types of IP (patents, copyright, trademarks, trade secrets), and learn how to formulate closed and open IP strategies. Further, you learn how to build IP portfolios and how to extract value from (unused) IP. Finally, patent landscaping techniques are introduced and you learn how to formulate IP strategies for weak IPR environments.
Course material
Used Course Material
* A reader available through Ekonomika.
Toledo
* Toledo is being used for this learning activity to share readings, lecture slides, etc.
Format: more information
Students interactively acquire insights of strategic IP Management. Throughout the course the case study method is used complemented by plenary discussions. Students should come to class having individually read the cases mentioned under ‘Class preparation’ for each session. Students can use the preparatory questions to guide their individual reading of the case. No case reports are required.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Strategic IP Management (B-KUL-D2O43a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The evaluation consists of a final exam and class participation.
* The written exam is a closed book exam and consists of open questions.
* The class participation consists of case and plenary discussions.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
* The final grade is a weighted score and consists of : the written exam which is graded and counts for 100%. The evaluation of class participation will lead to an adjustment varying from 0 to +2 points of the final grade.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
* Due to the nature of the class participation (i.e. the case and plenary discussions), the grade attained at the first examination opportunity will be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
Information about retaking exams
See explanation for further examination regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Intrapreneurship (B-KUL-D0O44A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Explain the role and unique nature of intrapreneurship
- Explain and illustrate a context for intrapreneurship
- Discuss tools and processes to create and select entrepreneurial ideas
- Explain and illustrate organizational structures to support intrapreneurship
Previous knowledge
There is no specific prior knowledge required for this course.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 3: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in het toerisme (Leuven e.a.) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- Master of Physics (Leuven) (Option: Physics for Society) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Antwerp) 60 ects.
- Master in de handelswetenschappen (dag + avond, programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2024-2025) (Brussel) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Administration (Brussels) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de handelswetenschappen (programma voor studenten gestart in 2024-2025 of later) (Brussel) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Intrapreneurship (B-KUL-D0O44a)
Content
This course discusses the importance and unique nature of intrapreneurship. We explain the processes firms use to create and select opportunities for new businesses by leveraging in-house and external ideas. Further we discuss how firms can create a context in which individuals are stimulated to act entrepreneurial. Finally, we explain how firms can design ambidextrous organizations in which entrepreneurial and existing activities coincide and mutually reinforce each other. Special attention is hereby given to the strategic role of corporate venturing.
Course material
Used Course Material
* A reader available through Ekonomika.
Toledo
* Toledo is being used for this learning activity to share readings, lecture slides, etc.
Format: more information
Students interactively acquire insights in the domain of intrapreneurship. Throughout the course the case study method is used complemented by plenary discussions. Students should come to class having individually read the cases mentioned under ‘Class preparation’ for each session. Students can use the preparatory questions to guide their individual reading of the case. No case reports are required.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Intrapreneurship (B-KUL-D2O44a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The evaluation consists of a final exam and class participation.
* The written exam is a closed book exam and consists of open questions.
* The class participation consists of case and plenary discussions.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
* The final grade is a weighted score and consists of the: the writen exam which is graded and counts for 100%. The evaluation of class participation will lead to an adjustment varying from 0 to +2 points of the final grade.
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
* Due to the nature of the class participation, the grade attained at the first examination opportunity will be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
Information about retaking exams
See explanation for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Organising for Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D0O45A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Define and evaluate the key strategic and organizational challenges that virtually all entrepreneurs face from founding a venture to managing its growth;
- Illustrate the key concepts and tools required to successfully cope with these challenges;
- Use insights from recent advances in entrepreneurship research to tackle practical challenges presented in the cases;
- Develop skills in analytical thinking and reflective judgement by reading and discussing complex, real-life scenarios.
Previous knowledge
There is no specific preknowledge required for this course.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 3: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in het toerisme (Leuven e.a.) 60 ects.
- Master of Physics (Leuven) (Option: Physics for Society) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in het management (Programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Organising for Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D0O45a)
Content
This course offers an overview of the main strategic decisions and organizational challenges involved in the process of exploiting a new business opportunity, from building to scaling a start-up. Drawing on recent advances in entrepreneurship theory and practice, the course focuses on the key approaches to successfully deal with these challenges.
Topics that will be discussed are, amongst others:
- Building the Founding Team
- Implementing the Business Opportunity
- The Lean Start-up Method
- Strategies for Growth
- Organizing for Growth
- Change Management
Course material
Used Course Material
A reader with scholarly papers will be provided through Ekonomika.
Case studies.
Toledo
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
Throughout the course the case study method is used complemented by plenary discussions and enriched by guest lecturers. Given the documented efficacy of active learning, case-discussion will play an important role in the course. Therefore, students should come to class having individually read the material assigned for each session. A set of learning questions will be provided to guide the individual reading of the case as well as the class discussion.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Organising for Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D2O45a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
- The evaluation consists of a final exam:
- The written exam is a closed book exam and consists of open questions.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES:
- The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
- The final grade is a weighted score and consists of the following components:
- 90% on a written, closed book exam
- 10% on in class permanent evaluation
- If the student does not participate in the written exam, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken) for the whole course.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Entrepreneurial Finance (B-KUL-D0O46A)
Aims
This course aims to provide students with an understanding of how entrepreneurs succeed in mobilising the resources they need to start and grow their venture.
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- understand the implications of the important differences between new venture finance and corporate finance (finance of large public corporations);
- appreciate the differences in value to an underdiversified entrepreneur compared to a diversified investor and learn how to exploit the differences to design investment agreements;
- think about the business plan in terms of its purposes and recognize the importance of careful strategic planning and financial modeling;
- describe the various sources of funding for new ventures (venture capital, angel capital, private equity and many others) and evaluate which of the choices are feasible in the particular start-up setting;
- understand the organization of the venture capital industry and the economics underlying the contracts that are used in the industry;
- understand the importance of milestones in new venture development and can think about them in terms of decision trees;
- understand the basics of financial modeling, the importance of grounding the model in well-documented assumptions, and learn how to use the model to assess the venture's cash needs;
- value new venture opportunities using state-of-the art valuation methods and understand how these methods relate to the financial economic theory that you have learned in corporate finance (methods covered include the Venture Capital method, First Chicago method, discounted cash flow using either risk-adjusted discount rate or certainty equivalent approach, relative value);
- point out why harvesting is the essential focus of the initial investment decision and understand the costs and benefits of the various exit alternatives.
Previous knowledge
corporate finance
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 3: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Entrepreneurial Finance (B-KUL-D0O46a)
Content
This course provides you with an understanding of the economics of entrepreneurial finance. It proceeds by first addressing financing and strategic issues faced by entrepreneurs in the early stages of a firm. The course then provides an overview, and discusses the (dis)advantages of sources of finance that entrepreneurs can try to access and discusses techniques to reduce the venture's reliance on formal sources of external finance. Finally, the course explores different valuation techniques that are typically used for entrepreneurial ventures. Specific topics include: methods of valuing private firms; economics of contracts; and exit strategies.
Course material
Used course material:
* Textbook: Fundamentals of Entrepreneurial Finance (M. Da Rin, T. Hellmann) – Oxford University Press
* Course material and research papers, as distributed via Toledo
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Is also included in other courses
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Entrepreneurial Finance (B-KUL-D2O46a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
*The evalution consists of a written, closed book exam with open questions. The use of a calculator is allowed.
Determination of the final grades
*The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Second examination opportunity
*The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS Master's Thesis International Business, Strategy and Innovation (B-KUL-D0O48A)
Aims
Learning outcomes are evaluated for the master’s thesis in the field of the selected programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The student purposefully collects and selects relevant information from the scientific literature.
- The student reflects critically on (findings from) existing research.
- The student integrates information from existing research in function of the question.
- The student presents the described scientific findings correctly.
- The student refers adequately to sources used, both in the text and in the reference list.
- The student formulates clear and defined research questions and indicates their relevance.
- The student draws out a meaningful, feasible and verifiable research design with appropriate research methods and analysis techniques.
- The student motivates the methodological choices made.
- The student carries out the research design consistently.
- The student provides a clear, accurate description of the results.
- The student formulates an answer to the research questions.
- The student reflects critically on the own research, links back to findings from previous research and formulates suggestions for further research, for practice or for the government.
- The student reports, both orally and in writing, in a clear and correct manner on the research conducted.
- The student takes initiative, works independently and conscientiously on the master's thesis.
- The student deals constructively with the feedback obtained
Previous knowledge
The master's thesis can only be selected if the master's programme can be completed in the same academic year. The student may be granted permission to deviate from this general rule upon reasoned request and after advice from the study career consultant.
Identical courses
D0O41A: Masterproef international business, strategie en innovatie (TEW)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Master's Thesis International Business, Strategy and Innovation (B-KUL-D0O48a)
Content
The master's thesis aims to have students conduct and report (both written and oral) a scientific research project. The student works independently (individually or in group) but under the supervision of a supervisor.
The following general rules apply with regard to the subject of the master's thesis:
- The topic is consistent with the field of study of the programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The research assignment should be in line with the research or areas of specialisation of the supervisor (who supervises the approach and completion of the work).
- In developing their research, students have the opportunity to collaborate with the field (but this is not guaranteed for every topic or with every supervisor).
Course material
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity
Compulsory study material
The compulsory study material depends on the chosen topic for the master's thesis and can be discussed with the supervisor.
Additional recommended study material
The optional study material depends on the topic chosen for the master's thesis and is to be discussed with the supervisor. Students should make use of relevant scientific articles and literature that they search for themselves via e.g. electronic databases (e.g. LIMO or Google Scholar).
Format: more information
The master's thesis consists of two components:
- Writing a scientific article
- Oral defense of the master’s thesis
With this ECTS file there are supplementary master’s thesis regulations. Students are required to take note of these Regulations and appendices: everything is available online on the FEB master's thesis portal. If there are interim additions, announcements and/or updates during the academic year itself, these will be communicated to students via Toledo.
Points of Attention:
- Possible promoters, topics and information on how to choose them will be made available at the start of the academic year or in the 2nd semester (depending on the programme). If necessary, students may submit their own topics.
- Students who re-register for the ‘Master's thesis’ never automatically transfer their choice of subject and supervisor at that time. In principle, with the written agreement of the supervisor, the started master's thesis will be continued. These students make this known no later than the start of the academic year. The procedure for making this known will be communicated at the start of the academic year.
- Students moving abroad as part of their master's thesis must give at least 2 weeks' written notice. See FEB master's thesis portal for the procedure. If the planned itinerary and dates change afterwards or during the trip, this must be communicated again.
- Students can work on the master's thesis in groups or individually. More information can be found on the FEB master’s thesis portal.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Master's Thesis International Business, Strategy and Innovation (B-KUL-D2O48a)
Explanation
Evaluation Features
In order to successfully complete the course unit Master’s Thesis the student must fulfil the conditions listed below in a timely manner (see deadlines and procedures on the FEB master’s thesis portal):
- be fully in order with the choice and (re)start of the master’s thesis with a supervisor, incl. any project administration
- register for the oral defense (or apply for an early graduation);
- submit the master’s thesis and related documents via KU Loket (in case of group cooperation, specific guidelines apply);
- be available on campus on the scheduled defense dates. The student will receive a call no later than 1 week before the defense date with details about the specific defense time.
Only for weighty reasons (proven force majeure) can the Ombuds Service grant exceptions to the above conditions and corresponding deadlines.
Determination of final result
The evaluation of the master's thesis is based on various aspects (see Master's thesis regulations on the FEB master's thesis portal):
- Each master's thesis is assessed before the oral defence by an assessment committee using the table of assessment criteria (see FEB master's thesis portal).
- The student defends the master's thesis orally before an assessment committee and is assessed on this defence.
- The final score on the master's thesis is calculated as follows: paper (70%), defence/presentation paper (20%), attitude during the master's thesis process (10%)
- The student must be at least successful on the paper to pass the master's thesis.
- If the student is not successful on the paper, the grade of the paper is the final score for the master's thesis.
- To receive a final score, all evaluation activities must be taken. When the master's thesis is not submitted or submitted late or when the student is not present at the defence, the final score is ‘NA’ (=not taken).
- For sanctions regarding the non-submission or late submission of other compulsory documents, please refer to the FEB Master's thesis portal.
Information about retaking exams
The evaluation at the 2nd examination opportunity takes place in the same way as at the 1st examination opportunity. For master's theses involving group collaboration, the supervision team determines the reworking of the master's thesis.
ECTS Master's Thesis Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D0O49A)
Aims
Learning outcomes are evaluated for the master’s thesis in the field of the selected programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The student purposefully collects and selects relevant information from the scientific literature.
- The student reflects critically on (findings from) existing research.
- The student integrates information from existing research in function of the question.
- The student presents the described scientific findings correctly.
- The student refers adequately to sources used, both in the text and in the reference list.
- The student formulates clear and defined research questions and indicates their relevance.
- The student draws out a meaningful, feasible and verifiable research design with appropriate research methods and analysis techniques.
- The student motivates the methodological choices made.
- The student carries out the research design consistently.
- The student provides a clear, accurate description of the results.
- The student formulates an answer to the research questions.
- The student reflects critically on the own research, links back to findings from previous research and formulates suggestions for further research, for practice or for the government.
- The student reports, both orally and in writing, in a clear and correct manner on the research conducted.
- The student takes initiative, works independently and conscientiously on the master's thesis.
- The student deals constructively with the feedback obtained
Previous knowledge
The master's thesis can only be selected if the master's programme can be completed in the same academic year. The student may be granted permission to deviate from this general rule upon reasoned request and after advice from the study career consultant.
Identical courses
D0O42A: Masterproef entrepreneurship (TEW)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 2: Entrepreneurship) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Master's Thesis Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D0O49a)
Content
The master's thesis aims to have students conduct and report (both written and oral) a scientific research project. The student works independently (individually or in group) but under the supervision of a supervisor.
The following general rules apply with regard to the subject of the master's thesis:
- The topic is consistent with the field of study of the programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The research assignment should be in line with the research or areas of specialisation of the supervisor (who supervises the approach and completion of the work).
- In developing their research, students have the opportunity to collaborate with the field (but this is not guaranteed for every topic or with every supervisor).
Course material
Toledo is being used for this learning activity
Compulsory study material
The compulsory study material depends on the chosen topic for the master's thesis and can be discussed with the supervisor.
Additional recommended study material
The optional study material depends on the topic chosen for the master's thesis and is to be discussed with the supervisor. Students should make use of relevant scientific articles and literature that they search for themselves via e.g. electronic databases (e.g. LIMO or Google Scholar).
Format: more information
The master's thesis consists of two components:
- Writing a scientific article
- Oral defense of the master’s thesis
With this ECTS file there are supplementary master’s thesis regulations. Students are required to take note of these Regulations and appendices: everything is available online on the FEB master's thesis portal. If there are interim additions, announcements and/or updates during the academic year itself, these will be communicated to students via Toledo.
Points of Attention:
- Possible promoters, topics and information on how to choose them will be made available at the start of the academic year or in the 2nd semester (depending on the programme). If necessary, students may submit their own topics.
- Students who re-register for the ‘Master's thesis’ never automatically transfer their choice of subject and supervisor at that time. In principle, with the written agreement of the supervisor, the started master's thesis will be continued. These students make this known no later than the start of the academic year. The procedure for making this known will be communicated at the start of the academic year.
- Students moving abroad as part of their master's thesis must give at least 2 weeks' written notice. See FEB master's thesis portal for the procedure. If the planned itinerary and dates change afterwards or during the trip, this must be communicated again.
- Students can work on the master's thesis in groups or individually. More information can be found on the FEB master’s thesis portal.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Master's Thesis Entrepreneurship (B-KUL-D2O49a)
Explanation
Evaluation Features
In order to successfully complete the course unit Master’s Thesis the student must fulfil the conditions listed below in a timely manner (see deadlines and procedures on the FEB master’s thesis portal):
- be fully in order with the choice and (re)start of the master’s thesis with a supervisor, incl. any project administration
- register for the oral defense (or apply for an early graduation);
- submit the master’s thesis and related documents via KU Loket (in case of group cooperation, specific guidelines apply);
- be available on campus on the scheduled defense dates. The student will receive a call no later than 1 week before the defense date with details about the specific defense time.
Only for weighty reasons (proven force majeure) can the Ombuds Service grant exceptions to the above conditions and corresponding deadlines.
Determination of final result
The evaluation of the master's thesis is based on various aspects (see Master's thesis regulations on the FEB master's thesis portal):
- Each master's thesis is assessed before the oral defence by an assessment committee using the table of assessment criteria (see FEB master's thesis portal).
- The student defends the master's thesis orally before an assessment committee and is assessed on this defence.
- The final score on the master's thesis is calculated as follows: paper (70%), defence/presentation paper (20%), attitude during the master's thesis process (10%)
- The student must be at least successful on the paper to pass the master's thesis.
- If the student is not successful on the paper, the grade of the paper is the final score for the master's thesis.
- To receive a final score, all evaluation activities must be taken. When the master's thesis is not submitted or submitted late or when the student is not present at the defence, the final score is ‘NA’ (=not taken).
- For sanctions regarding the non-submission or late submission of other compulsory documents, please refer to the FEB Master's thesis portal.
Information about retaking exams
The evaluation at the 2nd examination opportunity takes place in the same way as at the 1st examination opportunity. For master's theses involving group collaboration, the supervision team determines the reworking of the master's thesis.
ECTS Master's Thesis Marketing Management (B-KUL-D0O50A)
Aims
Learning outcomes are evaluated for the master’s thesis in the field of the selected programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The student purposefully collects and selects relevant information from the scientific literature.
- The student reflects critically on (findings from) existing research.
- The student integrates information from existing research in function of the question.
- The student presents the described scientific findings correctly.
- The student refers adequately to sources used, both in the text and in the reference list.
- The student formulates clear and defined research questions and indicates their relevance.
- The student draws out a meaningful, feasible and verifiable research design with appropriate research methods and analysis techniques.
- The student motivates the methodological choices made.
- The student carries out the research design consistently.
- The student provides a clear, accurate description of the results.
- The student formulates an answer to the research questions.
- The student reflects critically on the own research, links back to findings from previous research and formulates suggestions for further research, for practice or for the government.
- The student reports, both orally and in writing, in a clear and correct manner on the research conducted.
- The student takes initiative, works independently and conscientiously on the master's thesis.
- The student deals constructively with the feedback obtained
Previous knowledge
The master's thesis can only be selected if the master's programme can be completed in the same academic year. The student may be granted permission to deviate from this general rule upon reasoned request and after advice from the study career consultant.
Identical courses
D0O47A: Masterproef marketing management(TEW)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 5: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Master's Thesis Marketing Management (B-KUL-D0O50a)
Content
The master's thesis aims to have students conduct and report (both written and oral) a scientific research project. The student works independently (individually or in group) but under the supervision of a supervisor.
The following general rules apply with regard to the subject of the master's thesis:
- The topic is consistent with the field of study of the programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The research assignment should be in line with the research or areas of specialisation of the supervisor (who supervises the approach and completion of the work).
- In developing their research, students have the opportunity to collaborate with the field (but this is not guaranteed for every topic or with every supervisor).
Course material
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity
Compulsory study material
The compulsory study material depends on the chosen topic for the master's thesis and can be discussed with the supervisor.
Additional recommended study material
The optional study material depends on the topic chosen for the master's thesis and is to be discussed with the supervisor. Students should make use of relevant scientific articles and literature that they search for themselves via e.g. electronic databases (e.g. LIMO or Google Scholar).
Format: more information
The master's thesis consists of two components:
- Writing a scientific article
- Oral defense of the master’s thesis
With this ECTS file there are supplementary master’s thesis regulations. Students are required to take note of these Regulations and appendices: everything is available online on the FEB master's thesis portal. If there are interim additions, announcements and/or updates during the academic year itself, these will be communicated to students via Toledo.
Points of Attention:
- Possible promoters, topics and information on how to choose them will be made available at the start of the academic year or in the 2nd semester (depending on the programme). If necessary, students may submit their own topics.
- Students who re-register for the ‘Master's thesis’ never automatically transfer their choice of subject and supervisor at that time. In principle, with the written agreement of the supervisor, the started master's thesis will be continued. These students make this known no later than the start of the academic year. The procedure for making this known will be communicated at the start of the academic year.
- Students moving abroad as part of their master's thesis must give at least 2 weeks' written notice. See FEB master's thesis portal for the procedure. If the planned itinerary and dates change afterwards or during the trip, this must be communicated again.
- Students can work on the master's thesis in groups or individually. More information can be found on the FEB master’s thesis portal.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Master's Thesis Marketing Management (B-KUL-D2O50a)
Explanation
Evaluation Features
In order to successfully complete the course unit Master’s Thesis the student must fulfil the conditions listed below in a timely manner (see deadlines and procedures on the FEB master’s thesis portal):
- be fully in order with the choice and (re)start of the master’s thesis with a supervisor, incl. any project administration
- register for the oral defense (or apply for an early graduation);
- submit the master’s thesis and related documents via KU Loket (in case of group cooperation, specific guidelines apply);
- be available on campus on the scheduled defense dates. The student will receive a call no later than 1 week before the defense date with details about the specific defense time.
Only for weighty reasons (proven force majeure) can the Ombuds Service grant exceptions to the above conditions and corresponding deadlines.
Determination of final result
The evaluation of the master's thesis is based on various aspects (see Master's thesis regulations on the FEB master's thesis portal):
- Each master's thesis is assessed before the oral defence by an assessment committee using the table of assessment criteria (see FEB master's thesis portal).
- The student defends the master's thesis orally before an assessment committee and is assessed on this defence.
- The final score on the master's thesis is calculated as follows: paper (70%), defence/presentation paper (20%), attitude during the master's thesis process (10%)
- The student must be at least successful on the paper to pass the master's thesis.
- If the student is not successful on the paper, the grade of the paper is the final score for the master's thesis.
- To receive a final score, all evaluation activities must be taken. When the master's thesis is not submitted or submitted late or when the student is not present at the defence, the final score is ‘NA’ (=not taken).
- For sanctions regarding the non-submission or late submission of other compulsory documents, please refer to the FEB Master's thesis portal.
Information about retaking exams
The evaluation at the 2nd examination opportunity takes place in the same way as at the 1st examination opportunity. For master's theses involving group collaboration, the supervision team determines the reworking of the master's thesis.
ECTS Socially Responsible Marketing (B-KUL-D0O51A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, students can:
- explain the challenges of applying marketing techniques to address societal problems (social marketing)
- distinguish different ways in which the authorities can manage behavioral change and the role of social marketing in this toolbox
- extract relevant information from scientific literature in the field of marketing and behavioral science
- design evidence-based (social) marketing solutions to societally relevant problems
- critically evaluate social marketing strategies proposed by companies and authorities based on scientific evidence.
- formulate and implement a sustainable marketing strategy for companies, based on scientific knowledge on and insights of Socially Responsible Marketing
- apply marketing techniques to persuade consumers to consume in a sustainable way. For this the student uses scientific insights in the drivers and barriers of sustainable consumption.
- communicate convincingly, and concisely his/her vision and actions in different contexts and account for his/her choices.
- critically reflect upon the growing sustainable challenges in marketing.
Previous knowledge
The student is familiar with the basic principles of marketing and the behavioral sciences.
Identical courses
HMG12A: Socially Responsible Marketing
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 5: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 8: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing Management) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Socially Responsible Marketing (B-KUL-D0O51a)
Content
The most recent definition of Marketing of the “American Marketing Association” indicates that Marketing is no longer only about value creation for the customers and companies, but also for society at large. Consumers and organizations are part of a bigger society, so also the resources needed to produce products and services should be taken into account. This course will emphasize how Marketing activities of for-profit and non-profit organizations can contribute to the achievement of the sustainable development goals.
First, this course will explain what socially responsible marketing means for profit organizations and which factors play a role. Examples of topics that will be covered are:
- How to make the marketing strategy and its implementation (more) sustainable?
- How to communicate CSR activities to consumers?
- The link between marketing and overconsumption and materialism.
- The marketing of new (more sustainable) business modelsSustainable consumption
- sustainable consumption
In short, students will be familiarized with how profit organizations can perform marketing in a sustainable way, as well as with the ecological and social impact of consumption
Second, this course will explain how marketing can be used in the collective interest (social marketing).
The following topics will be covered:
* The concept of social marketing (definition, background, function, issues) and its relation with adjacent fields
* Major evidence-based routes towards behavioral change (persuasion, incentive structure, social processes, choice architecture) and its relation to other similar toolboxes (e.g. laws)
* The analysis of social marketing cases and the behavioral principles used in several domains (e.G. healthy eating, pro-environmental behavior, pro-social behavior)
Third, this course covers the topic of ethics in marketing, as this is an essential part of socially responsible marketing. Examples of topics that will be covered are:
- The importance of marketing ethics
- Marketing practices that are perceived as unethical: an evolution
- The ethical decision making process
Course material
Slides and knowledge clips posted on Toledo
articles posted on Toledo
Format: more information
One part of the course consists of theoretical classes where theoretical frameworks are explained, and another part consists of interactive classes where the focus will be on the practical implication of the theory. The course uses the blended learning approach.
For the theoretical part, online videoclips will be distributed to the students a week before the interactive session in which the theory is explained. Students will also be asked to read some academic papers and case reports. It is important that the students watch the relevant videoclips and read the relevant papers as a preparation for the interactive classes.
During the interactive classes, we will have class discussions, question rounds, we will solve exercises and cases, and analyze campaigns.
Class discussions will be organized in groups, for example in the form of role plays.
- For example, students will need to argument a viewpoint from the view of the marketer, the consumer, …
- For example, students will discuss the a topic and take the role of an advocate or an opponent.
- For example, students need to apply a theoretical model to a specific case.
When possible the interactive classes will be on campus. Only when this is impossible, the interactive classes will be organised online.The interactive classes are not recorded (nor organized in a hybrid way).
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Socially Responsible Marketing (B-KUL-D2O51a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
The exam is a written, take home exam of limited duration (3 hours). The exam should be uploaded on the Toledo platform by the deadline. A back up system is provided via e-mail. Students may use any written material and the internet during the exam (course notes, books, etc.).
The exam consists of two parts.
- The assignment of the first part will be made available during the semester (in class + on Toledo). Students can work on the assignment of this first part during the semester. This assignment requires the student to reflect on one or more themes addressed in this course and/or to apply one or more concepts, theories, and frameworks from the socially responsible marketing domain. The specific objective of this assignment, as well as the accompanying feedback method, will be clearly and timely communicated by the coordinator of this course.ATTENTION: with this assignment, students cannot earn any points. The assignment is, however, mandatory. Students will need to relate their answers to the questions of the second part of the exam to their solution of this first assignment.
- The assignment of the second part of the exam will be communicated at the beginning of the written (computer) exam (via Toledo). There will be critical open questions, relating to the different parts of the course. Some questions will relate to the student's solution of the first assignment.
The solutions of both parts are to be submitted together on the day of the exam.
The procedure of the exam will be explained during the introductory class and the information will also be distributed through Toledo.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo.The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
In order to pass this course students need to upload a solution to the first assignment (first part of the examen) AND they need to attain at least 10/20 for the second part of the exam.
Information about retaking exams
SECOND EXAMINATION OPPORTUNITY
Students who did not succeed in the first exam period need to redo the exam as a whole (both parts).
The exam is a written, take home exam of limited duration (3 hours). The exam should be uploaded on the Toledo platform by the deadline. A back up system is provided via e-mail. Students may use any written material and the internet during the exam (course notes, books, etc.).
The exam consists of two parts.
- The assignment of the first part will be the same as the assignment of the first exam period. As in the first term, students cannot earn any points with this first part. The assignment is, however, mandatory. Students will need to relate their answers to the questions of the second part of the exam to their solution of this first assignment.
- The assignment of the second and main part of the exam will be communicated at the beginning of the written (computer) exam (via Toledo). There will be critical questions where the theory will need to be applied.the questions will relate to the solution of the first assignment, linking this assignement to the different parts of the course.
The solutions of both parts are to be submitted together on the day of the exam.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
In order to pass this course students need to upload a solution to the first assignment (first part of the examen) AND they need to attain at least 10/20 for the second part of the exam.
ECTS Credit and Banking (B-KUL-D0O52A)
Aims
The goal of this course is that students understand the role and relevancy of banks in the economy using up to date micro-economic and macro-economic approaches both from a theoretical and empirical point of view. Students should understand how banks and borrowers interact and how this impacts on their financing conditions. Shocks to banks may lead to credit supply shocks and exacerbate credit rationing. Students should learn how bank runs can occur and how micro and macro-prudential regulatory views can influence systemic risk and financial instability.
After finishing this course, the student can:
- advice firms and other customers on how to optimally engage banks and financial markets in different micro and macro-economic situations
- develop arguments about costs and benefits of intense bank-customer interactions
- develop arguments on why bank runs occur and how these can be prevented
- design techniques to correctly measure the impact of shocks to credit supply
- distinguish between reasons for micro-prudential and macro-prudential regulation
- propose measures of systemic risk and financial instability
- understand regulation in banking
Previous knowledge
The course requires intermediate knowledge on corporate finance, financial markets and banking.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 5: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Risk en finance) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Risk and Finance) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Risk and Finance) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Actuarial and Financial Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) (Major Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Credit and Banking (B-KUL-D0O52a)
Content
The course will discuss the following topics on the basis of international textbooks
- Role and relevance of banks in the economy
- Bank-borrower-interactions
- Credit supply and rationing
- Systemic risk, financial instability and bank runs
- Regulation of banks: micro- and macro prudential views
Course material
Used course material:
Parts of international textbooks containing both theory and empirics
- Freixas and Rochet (2008), the micro-economics of banking, MIT Press
- Degryse, Kim and Ongena (2009), the microeconometrics of banking: methods, applications and results, Oxford University press
Toledo
- Toledo is being used for this learning activity
Language of instruction: more information
Het opleidingsonderdeel dient toegankelijk te zijn voor studenten van buiten het Nederlandse taalgebied.
Format: more information
Students should attend the lectures in which the course materials are discussed
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Credit and Banking (B-KUL-D2O52a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation:
- the evaluation consists of a written, closed book exam with open questions
Determination of final grades:
- The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20
Second examination opportunity:
- The features of the evaluation and determination of final grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS International Business Finance (B-KUL-D0O53A)
Aims
The course helps to provide the practical tools expected from an international finance manager, i.e. (a) financing in the narrow sense (funding, financial investments), (b) risk management, esp. hedging (that is, risk reduction), and (c) help in decision making, by offering valuation of commercial or investment proposals. These tasks have to be viewed in a context where the extra complications include exchange risk and exposure.
Upon completion of this course, the student:
- is aware of the extra issues that complicate a CFO’s life when the context is international;
- is able to master the vital institutional concepts like how money is created and transfered, how the balance of payments works, and what the pros and cons are of various currency regimes, in light of post-war monetary history;
- has a good insight into the workings of spot currency markets, including triangular one- and two-way arb and the use of PPP rates and real rates
- has become familiar with the interlinkages between spot, forward and money markets and the potential for arb, including the implications of these linkages these for relative prices in perfect and imperfect markets;
- sees the logic and uses of the market value of a forward contract, including the crucial interpretation of the forward rate as a certainty equivalent;
- understands the uses for forward contracts (hedging, speculation on spot and swap rates, spot-forward swapping, other stuctured-finance applications);
- grasps the point in modern swaps, including ways to quantify the gains or losses and the uses this technique can be put to when comparing loan or bond offers that differ in terms of denominations and fee structures;
- has a good insight into the gains and costs a firm can face when cross-listing its shares, either in the traditional MM/CAPM finance framework or from the newer agency-cost/governance point of view;
- sees the fundamental sense, limitations and uses of traditional and international CAPMs as ways to set the cost of international capital;
- understands the basic logic and the potentially hilarious implications of the basic ways to limit double/triple taxation when the residence and source principles disagree – capital import neutrality and the exclusion privilege versus capital import neutrality and the credit system, as applied to Permanent Estabishments versus subsidiaries;
- has a fundamental understanding of the various ways to apply capital budgeting (investment analysis), including the issues around MM and the WACC and its alternative (two-stage adjusted NPV);
- masters the next issues that arise when capital budgeting is applied internationally, including the issue of fiscal considerations and the 3-stage Adjusted Net Present Value approach to that, the issue of the currency of evaluation (linked to the issue of segmentation/integration of financial markets), the cost of capital, issues of political risk, and so on;
- understands why/when cooperation forms (licensing, management contracts, joint vantures) may make sense next to solo strategies like exports and wholly-owned-subsidiary strategies, why in reality these strategies are often mixed together, and how a one-step combination of contract design and NPV can be implemented. The approach is fully based on modern finance and delivers a coherent view of financial markets and their interlinkages.
Previous knowledge
Basic business finance; basic statistics (expected value, regression); basic calculus
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 127 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
International Business Finance (B-KUL-D0O53a)
Content
1. Why you need to understand International Finance
2. International Finance: institutional background (home reading)
3. Spot markets for forex
4. Understanding forward markets for forex
5. Using forward contracts in financial management
6 (When) Should a Firm Hedge its Exchange Risk?
7 Measuring Exposure to Exchange Rates
8 International Taxation of Foreign Investments
9 Putting it all Together: International Capital Budgeting
10 Negotiating a Joint-Venture Contract: the NPV Perspective
Course material
Used Course Material
- Old exams
- Solutions to exercises (old textbook)
- Class slides
- Press clippings
Toledo
- Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Language of instruction: more information
Het opleidingsonderdeel dient toegankelijk te zijn voor studenten van buiten het Nederlandse taalgebied.
Format: more information
- Lectures
- Four to six homeworks and cases, prepared in groups of up to three students, with class discussion
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: International Business Finance (B-KUL-D2O53a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
*The evaluation consists of:
Homeworks and cases
Final exam
*The homeworks and cases need to be prepared in groups of up to three students and the solutions are discussed in class.
*The final exam is a written exam with open questions. The exam is 2 hrs closed-book sandwiching a 1 hr open-book part (e.g. 9:00-12:00 with open book 10:00-11:00).
Determination of the final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade at the first exam opportunity equals the 60/40 weighted average of Final (F) and Homeworks
(H) provided that H > F > 10; otherwise only the final matters.
Second exam opportunity
*The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity.
* At the second examination opportunity, the homeworks and cases are no longer part of the evaluation. The grade is entirely based on the final exam.
Information about retaking exams
* See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Business Finance (B-KUL-D0O54A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- appreciate the need and usefulness of different types of financing relative to the life cycle of a firm
- evaluate different types of crowdfunding, venture capital, private equity and bank financing from the perspective of the firm and the funding provider
- appreciate the opportunities as well as the functioning of an IPO
- understand the functioning of investor relations and place this activity within the context of the corporate governance of the listed firm
- appropriately apply different tools that are important in the evaluation of different forms of financing (a.o. valuation, financial planning).
Previous knowledge
The student should meet the criteria for the programme. The student should have basic knowledge on corporate finance, accounting and financial reporting
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Risk en finance) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 3: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 5: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Finance en financieel recht) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Risk and Finance) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Entrepreneurial Finance (B-KUL-D0O46a)
Content
This course provides you with an understanding of the economics of entrepreneurial finance. It proceeds by first addressing financing and strategic issues faced by entrepreneurs in the early stages of a firm. The course then provides an overview, and discusses the (dis)advantages of sources of finance that entrepreneurs can try to access and discusses techniques to reduce the venture's reliance on formal sources of external finance. Finally, the course explores different valuation techniques that are typically used for entrepreneurial ventures. Specific topics include: methods of valuing private firms; economics of contracts; and exit strategies.
Course material
Used course material:
* Textbook: Fundamentals of Entrepreneurial Finance (M. Da Rin, T. Hellmann) – Oxford University Press
* Course material and research papers, as distributed via Toledo
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Is also included in other courses
Financing Mature Firms (B-KUL-D0O54a)
Content
This course provides you with an understanding of the economics of corporate finance. It proceeds by first addressing financing and strategic issues faced by financial managers of mature firms. The course then provides an overview of funding sources that are available to such firms and discusses implications of a given financing mix for capital budgeting, valuation, and the firm’s continued success. The course also explores investor relations and corporate governance. Specific topics include: capital budgeting and valuation with leverage; long-term and short-term financing; economics of contracts; and exit strategies. The course has roles such as CFO, financial analyst, and/or loan officer in mind for your “future self”.
Course material
Used course material:
* Textbooks: Corporate Finance (Welch)
* Course material and research papers, as distributed via Toledo
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Language of instruction: more information
Het opleidingsonderdeel dient toegankelijk te zijn voor studenten van buiten het Nederlandse taalgebied.
Format: more information
Students should attend the lectures in which the course materials are discussed
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Business Finance (B-KUL-D2O54a)
Explanation
Evaluation caracteristics
The evaluation consists of a written, closed book exam with open questions
Determination final result
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are identical to those of the first examination opportunity, as described in the tab 'Explanation'.
ECTS Management Control and Cost Management (B-KUL-D0O58A)
Aims
After the course students should:
- Know how to apply calculations with regard to the management accounting techniques
- Be able to critically compare among alternative decision making tools, and their impact on firm policies
- Be able to identify pros and cons (Cost/benefit analyses) of different management accounting systems
- Know how to apply tools to provide advice with regard to management
- Know to express consequences of the different management accounting techniques on behavior of employees in organizations
- Be able to express how management accounting could be applied to support the strategy of the firm
Explanation
Where introductory courses focuses more on getting to know the details of different management accounting techniques, this course requires students to critically reflect on calculations and management accounting techniques. The course aims at a more advanced level, in which students learn to compare techniques for the functioning of the organization. One key aspect is decision making control or how management accounting can be used to align incentives between the firm and its employees and how it can be supportive in focusing the employees to the strategy of the firm. The other part focuses more on the decision facilitating role and how accounting can help to improve decisions of employees in the firm. The course aims at a critical reflection, as trade-offs between decision control and decision facilitating roles are described. Cost accounting techniques and impact on P&L account and human behavior will also be discussed.
Previous knowledge
No prerequisites, but introductory courses in both financial and managerial accounting are recommendable. The course is equivalent to 'Intermediate Management Accounting', that is offered in many international business study programs.
Identical courses
D9X08A: Management controle en kostenbeheersing
HMI06A: Management Control and Cost Management
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica: bidiplomering UNamur (inkomend) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering: Double Degree UNamur (incoming) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering: Double Degree UNamur (outgoing) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Management Control and Cost Management (B-KUL-D0O58a)
Content
This course is an intermediate management accounting course, which should ideally be followed after having covered basic concepts of management accounting. Having taken an introduction course in financial accounting is helpful but not required. The course focuses on two pillars. As a first pillar, the course introduces an economic based perspective for understanding the use of management accounting systems in organizations. People need to make decisions in the best interest of the organizations but interest of employees do not always align with interests of the firm. From a control perspective, different management accounting systems might be more affective in aligning such goals (incentive mechanisms such as EVA, budgeting, Balanced scorecard etc.). Another big pillar is how management accounting information should be distributed or measured to improve decision making within firms (cost accounting, quality costing, etc.). The course offers in-depth discussions a series of management accounting systems, ranging from the more established techniques in management accounting to more recently developed practices. The course aims at developing an analytical and critical mind towards these management accounting practices and their impact on corporate policies. Research based learning is incorporated in each lecture. Students should reflect on a research-based paper that relates to the course content. In addition components of research based learning are introduced in a team based assignment and participation in an individual research study.
Topics include, among other things the nature of costs, theory and methods of cost allocation, capital budgeting, organizational architecture, responsibility centers etc. It also focuses on strategic uses of management accounting information in a changing environment.
Course material
- Zimmerman, Accounting for decision-making and control, McGraw-Hill, 2014 (8th edition). All exercise numbers are drawn from this edition Changes to these exercises or materials for these exercises will be announced in due course.
- Additional materials in the form of background cases and research articles (downloadable via the library databases or Toledo; Note the contents of the lecture overview can be updated. Check Toledo for updates each week.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Management Control and Cost Management (B-KUL-D2O58a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
The deadline for team assignment and participation for the computer study will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADE
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
75% exam
20% team assignment
5% on participation in a computer study (research study)
If the set deadline for the team assignment was not respected, the student cannot sit the concluding exam and the final grade of the course will be NA (not attended).
If the student does not participate in the computer study, the grades for this partial evaluation will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
SECOND EXAMINATION OPPORTUNITY
*The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity.
*The grade attained at the first examination opportunity for team assignment and participation in the computer study will be transferred to the second examination opportunity, unless the student marks a box on the exam paper that the second exam opportunity should count for 100%.
Information about retaking exams
See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Master's Thesis Accounting and Financial Management (MBE) (B-KUL-D0O69A)
Aims
Learning outcomes are evaluated for the master’s thesis in the field of the selected programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The student purposefully collects and selects relevant information from the scientific literature.
- The student reflects critically on (findings from) existing research.
- The student integrates information from existing research in function of the question.
- The student presents the described scientific findings correctly.
- The student refers adequately to sources used, both in the text and in the reference list.
- The student formulates clear and defined research questions and indicates their relevance.
- The student draws out a meaningful, feasible and verifiable research design with appropriate research methods and analysis techniques.
- The student motivates the methodological choices made.
- The student carries out the research design consistently.
- The student provides a clear, accurate description of the results.
- The student formulates an answer to the research questions.
- The student reflects critically on the own research, links back to findings from previous research and formulates suggestions for further research, for practice or for the government.
- The student reports, both orally and in writing, in a clear and correct manner on the research conducted.
- The student takes initiative, works independently and conscientiously on the master's thesis.
- The student deals constructively with the feedback obtained
Previous knowledge
The master's thesis can only be selected if the master's programme can be completed in the same academic year. The student may be granted permission to deviate from this general rule upon reasoned request and after advice from the study career consultant.
Identical courses
D0O17A: Masterproef accounting en financieel management (TEW)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Master’s Thesis Accounting and Financial Management (MBE) (B-KUL-D0O69a)
Content
The master's thesis aims to have students conduct and report (both written and oral) a scientific research project. The student works independently (individually or in group) but under the supervision of a supervisor.
The following general rules apply with regard to the subject of the master's thesis:
- The topic is consistent with the field of study of the programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The research assignment should be in line with the research or areas of specialisation of the supervisor (who supervises the approach and completion of the work).
- In developing their research, students have the opportunity to collaborate with the field (but this is not guaranteed for every topic or with every supervisor).
Course material
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity
Compulsory study material
The compulsory study material depends on the chosen topic for the master's thesis and can be discussed with the supervisor.
Additional recommended study material
The optional study material depends on the topic chosen for the master's thesis and is to be discussed with the supervisor. Students should make use of relevant scientific articles and literature that they search for themselves via e.g. electronic databases (e.g. LIMO or Google Scholar).
Format: more information
The master's thesis consists of two components:
- Writing a scientific article
- Oral defense of the master’s thesis
With this ECTS file there are supplementary master’s thesis regulations. Students are required to take note of these Regulations and appendices: everything is available online on the FEB master's thesis portal. If there are interim additions, announcements and/or updates during the academic year itself, these will be communicated to students via Toledo.
Points of Attention:
- Possible promoters, topics and information on how to choose them will be made available at the start of the academic year or in the 2nd semester (depending on the programme). If necessary, students may submit their own topics.
- Students who re-register for the ‘Master's thesis’ never automatically transfer their choice of subject and supervisor at that time. In principle, with the written agreement of the supervisor, the started master's thesis will be continued. These students make this known no later than the start of the academic year. The procedure for making this known will be communicated at the start of the academic year.
- Students moving abroad as part of their master's thesis must give at least 2 weeks' written notice. See FEB master's thesis portal for the procedure. If the planned itinerary and dates change afterwards or during the trip, this must be communicated again.
- Students can work on the master's thesis in groups or individually. More information can be found on the FEB master’s thesis portal.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Master's Thesis Accounting and Financial Management (MBE) (B-KUL-D2O69a)
Explanation
Evaluation Features
In order to successfully complete the course unit Master’s Thesis the student must fulfil the conditions listed below in a timely manner (see deadlines and procedures on the FEB master’s thesis portal):
- be fully in order with the choice and (re)start of the master’s thesis with a supervisor, incl. any project administration
- register for the oral defense (or apply for an early graduation);
- submit the master’s thesis and related documents via KU Loket (in case of group cooperation, specific guidelines apply);
- be available on campus on the scheduled defense dates. The student will receive a call no later than 1 week before the defense date with details about the specific defense time.
Only for weighty reasons (proven force majeure) can the Ombuds Service grant exceptions to the above conditions and corresponding deadlines.
Determination of final result
The evaluation of the master's thesis is based on various aspects (see Master's thesis regulations on the FEB master's thesis portal):
- Each master's thesis is assessed before the oral defence by an assessment committee using the table of assessment criteria (see FEB master's thesis portal).
- The student defends the master's thesis orally before an assessment committee and is assessed on this defence.
- The final score on the master's thesis is calculated as follows: paper (70%), defence/presentation paper (20%), attitude during the master's thesis process (10%)
- The student must be at least successful on the paper to pass the master's thesis.
- If the student is not successful on the paper, the grade of the paper is the final score for the master's thesis.
- To receive a final score, all evaluation activities must be taken. When the master's thesis is not submitted or submitted late or when the student is not present at the defence, the final score is ‘NA’ (=not taken).
- For sanctions regarding the non-submission or late submission of other compulsory documents, please refer to the FEB Master's thesis portal.
Information about retaking exams
The evaluation at the 2nd examination opportunity takes place in the same way as at the 1st examination opportunity. For master's theses involving group collaboration, the supervision team determines the reworking of the master's thesis.
ECTS Behavioural Finance (B-KUL-D0O82A)
Aims
The first half of the course provides a solid foundation for behavioural decision theory. First, we introduce the standard choice theory under full rationality and examine how it may fail to explain certain patterns in the observed behaviour of people. Next, we examine various ways how one departs from the assumption of full rationality to account for behavioural aspects in decision making. As an application, we explore how bounded rationality helps to solve one of the most prominent puzzles in asset pricing—equity premium puzzle. Finally, we examine strategic decision making under bounded rationality. In the second—empirical—part, students should be able to assess the impact of psychology on individual choice behaviour when making financial decisions, and the subsequent implications for financial markets and corporate finance. We address important questions related to market efficiency, portfolio diversification, stock market anomalies, and financial bubbles, all through the lens of some psychological biases and limits of real economic agents.
The aims of the (first part of the) course are:
• To understand the rationality assumption in the context of decision-making under certainty and uncertainty
• To be able to give examples of when rational decision theory fails to explain the observed behaviour of people
• To be able to explain how and why one modifies the assumption of rationality in the context of decision-making
• To understand what the equity premium puzzle is and how it can be solved assuming bounded rationality
• To be able to apply behavioural analysis to various decision-making situations, such as market efficiency and portfolio diversification
Previous knowledge
To follow the course some basic knowledge of finance (NPV, valuation, interest rates, etc.), statistics (random variable, expected value, variance, correlation, etc.), and mathematics is required.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Financiële economie) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 3: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 5: Financial Economics) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Behavioural Finance (B-KUL-D0O82a)
Content
Part 1:
- Choice under certainty
- Judgment and choice under risk and uncertainty
- Intertemporal choice
- Asset pricing under bounded rationality
- Strategic interaction
Part 2:
- Efficient Market Hypothesis and Time-series Predictability: what is the benchmark of rationality
- Heuristics and prospect theory: investor psychology
- Demand by the average investor: diversification
- Demand by arbitrageurs: stock market anomalies
- Overconfidence: investor behavior
- Bubbles
Course material
* Erik Angner, 2020, A Course in Behavioral Economics, 3rd Edition
* Lecture slides and scientific articles (provided via Toledo)
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Behavioural Finance (B-KUL-D2O82a)
Explanation
Written, closed-book exam that consists of 2 parts:
- Theoretical behavioral finance (1/2 of the overall grade): Written, closed book examination
- Empirical behavioral finance (1/2 of the overall grade): Written, closed-book examination
The final grade is based on the final exam. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 0-20.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are identical to those of the first examination opportunity, as described in the tab 'Explanation'.
ECTS Sustainable Business, Reporting and Governance (B-KUL-D0O83A)
Aims
The course aims that the student
- Understand how sustainability regulation and stakeholder demand is driving change in doing business;
- Understand how to analyze and integrate the impacts of climate change and sustainability targets into financial planning and analysis; Explain how financial statements are affected by climate-and social related matters;
- Determine the factors that dictate how investors use sustainability information;
- Analyze, communicate and integrate sustainability assessment results into financial planning and analysis of the company;
- Understand what a well governed firm is and how governance contributes to long term value creation.
- Should be able to discuss the main reasons why governance is relevant
- What the main instruments are to reach a well governed firm (in Belgium and an international context)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en auditing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Governance (B-KUL-D0N73a)
Content
First, the concept of corporate governance is outlined as well as the relevance of governance for firm performance and long term value creation are explained. Not only financial performance, but also to aspects of business ethics are discussed.
Second, the various possible governance mechanisms are explained. The specific roles of the different governance mechanisms are addressed: the board, the different possible committees (audit committee, renumeration committee, governance committee), the role of the CEO (executive compensation), the role of the external auditor in the governance landscape. Furthermore, the impact of the ownership structure is studied.
Finally, the legal framework of corporate governance is discussed in both Anglo-Saxon and in European and Belgian contexts and the different requirements for listed companies (financial and non-financial companies) and non-listed companies are discussed.
Course material
Articles and literature
Preparatory material
Toledo
Format: more information
Prior to the practical case studies, guest speakers (including accounting firms) are invited who were involved in the supervision of these operations in order to explain the practical side of it.
Is also included in other courses
Sustainable Business and Reporting (B-KUL-D0O83a)
Content
Introduction to Sustainability : This topic provides an overview of definitions of the key sustainability crises of our time (climate change; biodiversity loss; inequality, social issues etc.), explanation of commonly used tools and frameworks; and how ESG information is used by stakeholders.
The environmental, social impact of business and new governance models. This topic provides an overview of
innovative practices to assess global climate and social challenges by the companies; new governance models reflect the new realities; identifying the needs of stakeholders through qualitative research and comparing models of governance structure
Sustainability and ESG assessments begins with explanation why and how environmental and social issues can be recognized as a financial risk and opportunity; and provides an overview of identification of key environmental and social issues relevant for business organization. How to establish robust data processes, controls and metrics to monitor ESG performance in collaboration with sustainability experts;
Analyzing, interpreting and applying sustainability results introduces how non-financial topics could impact on business’ performance and provides an overview of identification of key SDG data sources and tools to support organization’s sustainability analytics; applying data analytics principles to sustainability information;interpretation and applying professional skepticism to sustainability assessment results
Leadership in sustainability highlines the importance of the leadership role to successfully complete sustainability projects. Coverage includes how to engage peers and company management in sustainable projects, how to coach and instruct sustainability across an organization, and how to communicate to a variety of audiences.
Sustainability audit and assurance describes that sustainability audit and assurance is an independent review of the company’s internal sustainability processes and is used to increase the robustness, accuracy and reliability of information in sustainability reports for users in their decision-making.
Is also included in other courses
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Sustainable Business, Reporting and Governance (B-KUL-D2O83a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The written exam is a closed book exam consisting of open questions.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer, in line with the examination regulations and as communicated via Toledo.
* The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are identical to those of the first examination opportunity, as described in the tab 'Explanation'.
ECTS Sustainable Business and Reporting (B-KUL-D0O84A)
Aims
- Understand how sustainability regulation and stakeholder demand is driving change in doing business;
- Understand how to analyze and integrate the impacts of climate change and sustainability targets into financial planning and analysis; Explain how financial statements are affected by climate-and social related matters;
- Determine the factors that dictate how investors use sustainability information;
- Analyze, communicate and integrate sustainability assessment results into financial planning and analysis of the company;
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart in de master in 2024-2025 of later, en voor studenten gestart in de master en/of het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma vóór 2024-2025 indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Sustainable Business and Reporting (B-KUL-D0O83a)
Content
Introduction to Sustainability : This topic provides an overview of definitions of the key sustainability crises of our time (climate change; biodiversity loss; inequality, social issues etc.), explanation of commonly used tools and frameworks; and how ESG information is used by stakeholders.
The environmental, social impact of business and new governance models. This topic provides an overview of
innovative practices to assess global climate and social challenges by the companies; new governance models reflect the new realities; identifying the needs of stakeholders through qualitative research and comparing models of governance structure
Sustainability and ESG assessments begins with explanation why and how environmental and social issues can be recognized as a financial risk and opportunity; and provides an overview of identification of key environmental and social issues relevant for business organization. How to establish robust data processes, controls and metrics to monitor ESG performance in collaboration with sustainability experts;
Analyzing, interpreting and applying sustainability results introduces how non-financial topics could impact on business’ performance and provides an overview of identification of key SDG data sources and tools to support organization’s sustainability analytics; applying data analytics principles to sustainability information;interpretation and applying professional skepticism to sustainability assessment results
Leadership in sustainability highlines the importance of the leadership role to successfully complete sustainability projects. Coverage includes how to engage peers and company management in sustainable projects, how to coach and instruct sustainability across an organization, and how to communicate to a variety of audiences.
Sustainability audit and assurance describes that sustainability audit and assurance is an independent review of the company’s internal sustainability processes and is used to increase the robustness, accuracy and reliability of information in sustainability reports for users in their decision-making.
Is also included in other courses
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Sustainable Business and Reporting (B-KUL-D2O84a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The written exam is a closed book exam consisting of open questions.
Determination of final grades
*The grades ar determined by the lecturer, in line with the examination regulations and as communicated via Toledo.
*The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are identical to those of the first examination opportunity, as described in the tab 'Explanation'.
ECTS Master's Thesis Personnel and Organization (B-KUL-D0O85A)
Aims
Learning outcomes are evaluated for the master’s thesis in the field of the selected programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The student purposefully collects and selects relevant information from the scientific literature.
- The student reflects critically on (findings from) existing research.
- The student integrates information from existing research in function of the question.
- The student presents the described scientific findings correctly.
- The student refers adequately to sources used, both in the text and in the reference list.
- The student formulates clear and defined research questions and indicates their relevance.
- The student draws out a meaningful, feasible and verifiable research design with appropriate research methods and analysis techniques.
- The student motivates the methodological choices made.
- The student carries out the research design consistently.
- The student provides a clear, accurate description of the results.
- The student formulates an answer to the research questions.
- The student reflects critically on the own research, links back to findings from previous research and formulates suggestions for further research, for practice or for the government.
- The student reports, both orally and in writing, in a clear and correct manner on the research conducted.
- The student takes initiative, works independently and conscientiously on the master's thesis.
- The student deals constructively with the feedback obtained
Previous knowledge
The master's thesis can only be selected if the master's programme can be completed in the same academic year. The student may be granted permission to deviate from this general rule upon reasoned request and after advice from the study career consultant.
Identical courses
D0O20A: Masterproef personeel & organisatie (TEW)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Master's Thesis Personnel and Organization (B-KUL-D0O85a)
Content
The master's thesis aims to have students conduct and report (both written and oral) a scientific research project. The student works independently (individually or in group) but under the supervision of a supervisor.
The following general rules apply with regard to the subject of the master's thesis:
- The topic is consistent with the field of study of the programme and the chosen subdomain (major/specialization), if applicable.
- The research assignment should be in line with the research or areas of specialisation of the supervisor (who supervises the approach and completion of the work).
- In developing their research, students have the opportunity to collaborate with the field (but this is not guaranteed for every topic or with every supervisor).
Course material
This learning activity uses Toledo
Compulsory study material
The compulsory study material depends on the chosen topic for the master's thesis and can be discussed with the supervisor.
Additional recommended study material
The optional study material depends on the topic chosen for the master's thesis and is to be discussed with the supervisor. Students should make use of relevant scientific articles and literature that they search for themselves via e.g. electronic databases (e.g. LIMO or Google Scholar).
Format: more information
The master's thesis consists of two components:
- Writing a scientific article
- Oral defense of the master’s thesis
With this ECTS file there are supplementary master’s thesis regulations. Students are required to take note of these Regulations and appendices: everything is available online on the FEB master's thesis portal. If there are interim additions, announcements and/or updates during the academic year itself, these will be communicated to students via Toledo.
Points of Attention:
- Possible promoters, topics and information on how to choose them will be made available at the start of the academic year or in the 2nd semester (depending on the programme). If necessary, students may submit their own topics.
- Students who re-register for the ‘Master's thesis’ never automatically transfer their choice of subject and supervisor at that time. In principle, with the written agreement of the supervisor, the started master's thesis will be continued. These students make this known no later than the start of the academic year. The procedure for making this known will be communicated at the start of the academic year.
- Students moving abroad as part of their master's thesis must give at least 2 weeks' written notice. See FEB master's thesis portal for the procedure. If the planned itinerary and dates change afterwards or during the trip, this must be communicated again.
- Students can work on the master's thesis in groups or individually. More information can be found on the FEB master’s thesis portal.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Master's Thesis Personnel and Organization (B-KUL-D2O85a)
Explanation
Evaluation Features
In order to successfully complete the course unit Master’s Thesis the student must fulfil the conditions listed below in a timely manner (see deadlines and procedures on the FEB master’s thesis portal):
- be fully in order with the choice and (re)start of the master’s thesis with a supervisor, incl. any project administration
- register for the oral defense (or apply for an early graduation);
- submit the master’s thesis and related documents via KU Loket (in case of group cooperation, specific guidelines apply);
- be available on campus on the scheduled defense dates. The student will receive a call no later than 1 week before the defense date with details about the specific defense time.
Only for weighty reasons (proven force majeure) can the Ombuds Service grant exceptions to the above conditions and corresponding deadlines.
Determination of final result
The evaluation of the master's thesis is based on various aspects (see Master's thesis regulations on the FEB master's thesis portal):
- Each master's thesis is assessed before the oral defence by an assessment committee using the table of assessment criteria (see FEB master's thesis portal).
- The student defends the master's thesis orally before an assessment committee and is assessed on this defence.
- The final score on the master's thesis is calculated as follows: paper (70%), defence/presentation paper (20%), attitude during the master's thesis process (10%)
- The student must be at least successful on the paper to pass the master's thesis.
- If the student is not successful on the paper, the grade of the paper is the final score for the master's thesis.
- To receive a final score, all evaluation activities must be taken. When the master's thesis is not submitted or submitted late or when the student is not present at the defence, the final score is ‘NA’ (=not taken).
- For sanctions regarding the non-submission or late submission of other compulsory documents, please refer to the FEB Master's thesis portal.
Information about retaking exams
The evaluation at the 2nd examination opportunity takes place in the same way as at the 1st examination opportunity. For master's theses involving group collaboration, the supervision team determines the reworking of the master's thesis.
ECTS International and Group Accounting (B-KUL-D0O86A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student:
*can interpret and discuss the IFRS framework
*has a basic knowledge about the content of the IFRS standards
*can explain the main differences between the IFRS standards and the Belgian accounting framework
*can critically approach issues related to financial accounting and reporting, assess how the flexibility under IFRS can affect the usefulness and comparability of financial information under IFRS
*Explain the importance of consolidated information.
* Provide criticism of consolidation regulations, taking into account the possibilities of creative consolidation, both according to IFRS.
* Apply consolidation methods and the equity method or capital mutation method to integrated examples.
* Understand all the key theoretical concepts of consolidation and the current legislation.
* Explain what deferred taxes are and apply them to exercises.
* Financially analyze and interpret a consolidated financial statement.
* Apply the issue of foreign currency in the consolidation process.
Previous knowledge
The course requires basic knowledge of micro-economics or business economics and knowledge of accounting as taught in the bachelors TEW and HIR
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2024-2025 in de master en/of in het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en auditing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 127 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart in de master in 2024-2025 of later, en voor studenten gestart in de master en/of het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma vóór 2024-2025 indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
International and Group Accounting (B-KUL-D0O86a)
Content
IFRS:
- International reporting standards within the EU
- Conceptual framework
- Reporting and presentation of the financial statements
- Balance sheet and profit & loss account
- Financial instruments
Group accounting:
- Importance of consolidated financial statements
- Regulations regarding IFRS group accounting
- Applications (full consolidation, proportionate consolidation, equity consolidation, deferred taxes, foreign currencies, exercise and cases)
- Legislation and regulation
- Financial analysis of consolidated financial statements
Course material
- International Financial Reporting – A practical guide (Alan Melville), Sixth edition 2016
- Slide decks will be made available throughout the year via Toledo.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: International and Group Accounting (B-KUL-D2O86a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The exam consists of a closed book part ('Group Accounting', open and multiple choice questions) and an open book part ('International Accounting', open and multiple choice questions). For multiple choice questions, a correction for incorrect answers is applied. Details will be explained during lectures and on Toledo.
Determination of final grades
The grades are determined by the lecturer in line with the examination regulations and as communicated via Toledo. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
ECTS Responsible Organizations: Critical Perspectives, Part I (B-KUL-D0O87A)
Aims
After successfully completing this course, the student will be able to:
- discuss the interrelationship between corporate organizations and grand challenges, while acknowledging the two-fold role of corporate entities in both contributing to and addressing these challenges;
- understand and apply critical management theories to analyze the strengths and weaknesses of (responsible) organizational practices;
- understand the significance and varieties of cross-sector partnerships as a strategy to effectively address grand challenges;
- critically analyze the approach of organizations in addressing the grand challenge of inequality and social justice.
Previous knowledge
N.A.
Is included in these courses of study
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part I (B-KUL-D0O87a)
Content
The (im)possibility of responsible organizations: A first, critical reflection on the pillars of CSR
Critical management studies: Critical theories on the role of business organizations in society
Transformation towards responsible organizations: Conditions of possibility
Responsible organizations and their involvement in cross-sector partnerships to address grand challenges
Responsible organizations and their approach to inclusion to address (in)equality and social (in)justice
Course material
PowerPoint presentations and scholarly articles are made available through Toledo
Format: more information
Group assignment - Individual assignment - Presentation
The lecture consists of a mix of lectures, interaction around research articles and the group assignment.
For each of the topics, the instructor will provide lectures based on recent articles and practical materials (case studies, film clips, company documentation). Students are expected to prepare in advance and interact with the lecturer and with each other on critical issues of concern.
One group assignment is given around the lecture topics where the groups focus on a particular theme. Details on the group assignment are communicated during lectures and through Toledo.
Is also included in other courses
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Responsible Organizations: Critical Perspectives, Part I (B-KUL-D2O87a)
Explanation
* The course is assessed by the instructor, as communicated through Toledo and the examination regulations. The result is calculated and expressed with a whole number at 20.
* The final result is determined as follows: a Group Assignment accounts for 40% and the Individual Essay accounts for 60% in the final result. Passing the course is only possible when one passes the individual essay component. Possibly, peer evaluation will be applied. This will be communicated via Toledo.
* If the student does not participate in the partial evaluation, the student will receive NA (not taken) for the entire course unit.
Information about retaking exams
The second examination opportunity involves an individual essay. The result of the group assignment from the first semester still counts for 40% of the final result. Passing the course is only possible when one passes the individual essay component. If the student did not participate in the group assignment, there will be an additional individual assignment.
ECTS Digital Marketing (B-KUL-D0Q05A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student can:
- Understand how digital marketing fits within a larger marketing and/or customer relationship building strategy
- Develop a digital marketing mindset; being able to inventorize opportunities and threats of technologies for relationship building (overall, and for specific companies/settings) + being able to critically reflect on and discuss recent issues and developments in the digital age for customer relationship building and management
- Master theoretical frameworks and concepts (old and new ones) that are relevant for understanding and managing the current marketing landscape in the digital age
- Master tools (old and new ones) that can be employed for digital marketing
- Reflect on the ethical aspects of data and analytics
- Analyze data that is available through digital platforms and draw conclusions to strengthen customer relationship building in the digital age
Previous knowledge
Introduction to Marketing (not necessarily KU Leuven)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 5: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 8: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing Management) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Digital Marketing (B-KUL-D0Q05a)
Content
Traditional lectures (hoorcolleges) by means of class recordings.
The traditional lectures consist of 10 modules
The goal of these modules is to transfer knowledge about digital marketing concepts, theories and trends.
Per module, I have 2 to 6 recordings, all together totaling 17 hours.
Module 1: Introduction to digital marketing
Module 2: Digital Mindset, Disruption and Change
Module 3: Back to the Future: Updated CRM for traditional + digital marketing integrated
Module 4: Role of Customers: Customer Experience in the Digital Age
Module 5: Role of Customers: Customer Engagement in the Digital Age
Module 6: The Role of Technology
Module 7: The Role of Employees for Digital Marketing
Module 8: Digital Marketing Analytics
Module 9: Understanding People Reactions towards Technology
Module 10: Value
In addition to these modules, students will need to obtain certificates from a supplementary online course. More information will be provided during the first session and via Toledo.
Practice session (oefensessies) by means of interactive lectures and flipped classroom
The goal of the practice sessions involves a deeper procession of the information acquired in the traditional lectures by means of guided exercises, quizzes and Q&A.
6 sessions (of 2.5 hours each), totaling 15 hours, will be organized, in which we will deep-dive in some of the concepts of the traditional lectures. During these interactive sessions, students (individually or in group) will be assigned to guided exercises. Some of these in-class assignments are voluntary, whereas others are mandatory (such that participation in class on campus will be required for these latter sessions).
In addition, during these sessions there will be room for Q&A (questions from students) and quizzes too (questions from the teacher) with regard to the 10 aforementioned modules.
At the beginning of the course, the lecture will share the timeline of the course, including the dates when in-class participation is required.
Group assignments (groepstaak): there will be 3 types of group assignments:
Assignment 1: Analyze the digital transformation of a company or organization of your choice; and advice recommendations based on the concepts covered in this course. The end product will be a paper and a presentation.
Assignment 2: A digital marketing analytics exercise (website analytics / social media analytics)
Assignment 3: Some of the in-class assignments during the Practice Sessions will be graded too.
For these assignments, feedback sessions per group will be organized, in which there will be room for Q&A. Specifically, 20min (Assignment 1) + 10min (Assignment 2) will be organized, per group = 30min per group.
The students can enroll in a group and will work with the same group on all group assignments.
Course material
Slides
Scientific Papers
Extra-academic material (press releases, cases)
Online course organized by an external organization
Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Language of instruction: more information
Because of the international focus of the course, it makes more sense to teach it in English. It is also more efficient.
Format: more information
Lectures, practical sessions and guest speaker(s): i
- in which the basics of digital marketing analytics will be lectured and practiced
- in which the state of the art of digital marketing will discussed, both on the basis of academic sources and other materials.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Digital Marketing (B-KUL-D2Q05a)
Explanation
Evaluation characteristics
The evaluation exists of three parts: (1) certificates to be obtained via an online course, (2) group assignments, (3) an a final written exam
- Part 1: Each student is required to obtain certificates from an online course (more information will be provided during the first lecture and via Toledo).
- Part 2: For the group assignment, students will evaluate a digital marketing strategy of an organization; will conduct a digital marketing analysis; and will engage in in-class activities that will be graded too
- Part 3: The exam is closed book and will exist of open questions about the course material.
More details about the assignments will be communicated via Toledo in the beginning of the academic year.
Determination final result
Students have to obtain the certificates of the online course (Part 1) before the date of the exam. No grades will be assigned to this part of the evaluation, students will be evaluated on a pass/fail basis. If students deliver proof of having obtained the certificates before the indicated deadline, they will receive a pass for this component. If students did not obtain the certificates before the assigned deadline, the student will receive a NA for this component, which results in a NA for the entire course.
The final grade will be based on the assignments and the final exam (part 2 and 3). Specifically, fifty percent of the grade is determined by the written exam and the rest is determined by the assignments. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
Students have to pass 10/20 or more on the written exam to pass the course unit. For students who pass less, the mark on the written examination counts as the final mark for the course unit.
If the student does not participate in one of the partial assessments, the student receives NA (Not taken) for the entire course.
Information about retaking exams
Second exam opportunity
Identical to the first exam opportunity. When the students passes for one part of the course (written exam or one of the assignments), the grade of that part will be transferred to the second exam opportunity grade. When the student has to redo the group assignment, an alternative individual assignment will be provided.
ECTS Strategic Management (B-KUL-D0R04A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student can:
- Recognize, clarify and illustrate core concepts of strategic management
- Explain which strategic choices a company should make and indicate the connection between these different choices
- Analyse cases and suggest concrete solutions, based on theoretical insights from the lectures
- Illustrate the contrast between theoretical knowledge and practical situations/issues
- Select relevant information out of academic sources and articles
Previous knowledge
There is no specific preknowledge required for this course.
Identical courses
D0S01A: Strategisch management
HMI05A: Strategic Management
Is included in these courses of study
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Strategie, innovatie en (internationaal) bedrijfsrecht) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering: Double Degree UNamur (outgoing) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Strategic Management (B-KUL-D0R04a)
Content
One of the most important decisions which an enterprise or an organization has to take is determining the direction in which they want to grow and develop. This is called strategy. In a strategy, an enterprise determines where and how it wishes to compete and which investments it will have to do and which skills it shall have to build in order to be successful. Both existing and new enterprises need strategies. One important finding during the last years is that great (and sometimes persisting) differences exist between the business results of enterprises.
In this course, an analysis is made of how the business results of enterprises and the accomplishments of organizations are determined by a combination of strategy, business branch structure and surroundings. This analysis is then used to indicate how enterprises formulate and implement strategies.
Two levels of strategy formulation will be discerned: competition strategy and concern strategy. A competition strategy indicates how an enterprise can position itself on a business branch and how it can gain a competing advantage. A concern strategy indicates in which business branches an enterprise needs to invest (for example through internal developments, takeovers or joint-ventures).
Course material
Used course material:
- Slides, which will be uploaded on Toledo
- Course notes, taken during the lectures
- Literature, which will be uploaded on Toledo
Recommended reading:
- Reader (bundling of all relevant articles), which is available at Ekonomika Kursusdienst
Toledo is being used for this learning activity
Format: more information
The focus of this course is on explaining the core concepts of Strategic Management. Students are expected to critically and thoroughy study the theory and examples that are presented during the lectures. For every chapter a list will be provided with the recommended readings that should be read for a clear understanding of the concepts and examples presented in class. These recommended readings will be bundled in a 'reader'.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Strategic Management (B-KUL-D2R04a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
- The exam is a written, closed-book exam
- There will be both open and closed questions (possibly in the format of multiple choice questions)
- In case of multiple choice questions, correction for guessing will be taken into account
- Students can use a NON-graphic calculator during the exam
- Bonus Points: During the semester students can earn 1 or 2 Bonus Points by participating in relevant exercises related to the course such as the Leuven Case Competition organized by Ekonomika. This might vary by year depending on the offering, but will be clearly announced at the start of the semester on Toledo, in the Syllabus and in class.
- During the semester, some sample exam questions will be made available on Toledo
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
- The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule.
- The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity. At the second exam opportunity, the bonus points are no longer part of the evaluation and the final assessment consists only of the exam.
ECTS Strategic Financial Management (B-KUL-D0R05A)
Aims
Students can make strategic and tactical decisions in the financial management of a firm, evaluating both long-term alternatives and short-term financing decisions, including financial restructurings, share issuances and share buybacks. Students are able to make decisions about mergers & acquisitions and asset sales.
Upon completion of the course, a student is able to:
- understand the theory and empirical evidence of M&As and financial restructurings
- have the knowledge and the skills to evaluate merger and acquisitions decisions
- evaluate and propose a suitable divestiture strategy for a company taking into account both company characteristics and the general environment in which the company operates
- evaluate and interpret results of existing empirical event studies and is able to perform an empirical event study in the context of M&A-related events
- assess the financial and organizational consequences of financial restructuring strategies and evaluate their suitability given the characteristics of the firm and the general environment in which the company operates
- evaluate the motives, the methods and the strategic and financial consequences of initial and seasonsed equity offerings
- distinguish between several motives for share repurchases and to evaluate the advantages, disadvantages and consequences of different repurchase methods
- evaluate and propose a suitable investment strategy to benefit from the insights provided by the literature on M&As and restructuring, both ex ante and ex post (merger arbitrage)
- assess the legal and regulatory environment of M&As
- structure the right method of payment for a deal
- evaluate and propose strategic and tactical M&A decisions guided by the overall strategy of the firm
- identify the most important M&A theories
- interpret the empirical evidence of M&As
- evaluate M&A deals
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, students are able to explain the main concepts of an introductory course in Banking and Corporate Finance
Identical courses
D0O68A: Strategisch financieel management
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master in het informatiemanagement (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) (Optie: Finance en financieel recht) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 127 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Strategic Financial Management (B-KUL-D0R05a)
Content
- Mergers and acquisitions: theory
- Event studies
- Mergers and acquisitions: empirical evidence
- Equity issuances
- Restructuring and divestitures
- Financial Restructuring
- Going private/ LBO
- Share repurchases
- Takeover defenses
- Investment strategies & merger arbitrage
Course material
Used course material
* ‘Takeovers, Restructuring, and Corporate Governance’ by J. Fred Weston, Mark L. Mitchell and J. Harold Mulherin
* Extra course material is made available via Toledo
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Strategic Financial Management (B-KUL-D2R05a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The evaluation consists of assignments and a final exam.
* The assignments are group assignments. The term of deliverance and deadlines will be determined by the lecturers.
* The final exam is a written, closed book exam. There is a correction for guessing in answering the multiple choice questions on the exam.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturers as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
* The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- 20% on the assignments
- 80% on the final exam
Second examinaiton opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity
* At the second examination period the assignments are no longer part of the evaluation. The final grade is entirely based on the written, closed-book exam.
Information about retaking exams
* See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Market Response Models (B-KUL-D0R14A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- discriminate between market response models and can decide which model can be used on a certain type of data.
- apply advanced models on available historic market data in support of marketing decisions
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course a student should have general knowledge of marketing and general linear models (OLS, hypothesis testing) and should be familiar with the use of a statistical software package, as is illustrated in the courses Marketing and Managerial statistics respectively (or similar courses) .
Is included in these courses of study
- Doctoral Programme in Business Economics (Leuven)
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Statistics and Data Science (on campus) (Leuven) (Statistics and Data Science for Business) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 7: Quantitative Marketing) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Market Response Models (B-KUL-D0R14a)
Content
As quantitative information about markets and marketing actions becomes more widely available, the modern marketing manager is presented with a new challenge and opportunity: how to analyze this information accurately and efficiently, and how to use it to enhance marketing productivity. Marketing models are tools for achieving these objectives.
This course introduces the student to the state-of-the-art in implementable marketing models. The emphasis is on models that are based on the statistical interpretation of historical data available to the company. As such, the course focuses on marketing decisions for established products.
Topics will include
- Marketing models for marketing planning and forecasting
- Design of sales response models (Static and dynamic)
- Models of competition
- Well-known marketing models
- Market-share attraction models
- Granger-causality testing
- Validation of your model
- Implementation issues
- Estimation issues
- Recent buzz words
- Reflections on the future of marketing modelling
Course material
Used Course Material
- Textbook: Market Response Models by Hanssens, Parsons and Schultz, 2nd edition.
- Articles and literature (online sources and Ekonomika bookshop)
- Slides (Ekonomica bookshop)
Toledo
- Toledo is being used for this learning activity
Format: more information
The sessions are devoted to the presentation and discussion of various modeling techniques, along with examples of their use and estimation. The lectures are often accompanied by assigned readings. These readings are an integral part of the course.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Market Response Models (B-KUL-D2R14a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
*Evaluation will be based on one homework assignment and a written, open book exam with open-ended questions
*The homework assignment is a group assignment (group of 2 or 3 persons)
*The deadline for the homework assignment will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
*The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- an open book written exam: 80% (16 points out of 20)
- homework assignment: 20% of the grade each (4 points out of 20).
*If the student does not participate in the homework assignment, the grade for this partial evaluation will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
* The homework cannot be hand-written (a hand-written homework will receive a 0-grade within the calculation of the final grade)
*If the set deadline for the homework assignments was not respected, the grade for the respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
SECOND EXAMINATION OPPORTUNITY
*The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity.
*At the second examination opportunity, previously obtained grades for the homework are void. The final grade is entirely based on the final written exam.
Information about retaking exams
* See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Marketing Strategy Modelling (B-KUL-D0R16A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Properly analyze market and firm level information to identify a firm’s established and desirable position in the market
- Use this information to formulate new strategic directions within an existing firm to improve its long-term competitive position
- Develop a coherent implementation plan with tactical decisions to execute these new strategic objectives
- Evaluate the impact of these strategic decisions on one’s business, and adjust strategic objectives if necessary
- Use state-of-the-art concepts, theories and models to answer key strategic marketing issues and to make proper decisions in these areas
- Apply and evaluate models for strategic marketing decisions and in particular translate model insights into managerial implications
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course students need to be familiar with basic concepts of marketing as illustrated in an introduction course Marketing (Strategy). Moreover, it is advisable to have knowledge about marketing research (i.e. segmentation analysis & perceptual mapping). Furthermore, students should master basic principles of statistics and econometrics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 7: Quantitative Marketing) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Educatieve master in de economie (Leuven) 90 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Marketing Strategy Modelling: Theory (B-KUL-D0R16a)
Content
The course discusses a number of contemporary challenges in strategic marketing in more depth. More specifically, it offers state-of-the-art concepts, theories and models on key strategic marketing issues surrounding various organizations and how to make proper decisions in these areas. The following topics are selected:
- Competition and its implications for marketing strategy
- Marketing strategy in turbulent times
- Customer-based marketing strategy
- Marketing strategy & firm value
Course material
Obligatory readings
- Course sheets on Toledo
- Compulsory academic papers and book chapters available on Toledo
Recommended readings
Academic articles and book chapters available on Toledo
Format: more information
Students are expected to become familiar with important topics of marketing strategy modeling and thought during course lectures.
Marketing Strategy Modelling: Practice (B-KUL-D0S03a)
Content
While the specific duties of a marketing manager vary considerably across industries and companies, the Markstrat game focuses on the four major activities common to the position: (1) analysis of market information, (2) developing a marketing strategy, (3) programming the strategy, and (4) implementation. The course attempts to simulate the marketing manager’s job through the development and implementation of a marketing plan in the context of Markstrat simulations.
Course material
Obligatory readings
- MARKSTRAT ebook
- Course sheets on Toledo
- Compulsory academic papers and book chapters available on Toledo
Recommended readings
Academic articles and book chapters available on Toledo
Format: more information
The Markstrat© simulation game is intended to use the insights and tools learned in basic marketing courses to make adequate strategic marketing decision for a hypothetical firm in a simulated environment. This team project offers students a unique opportunity to practice and improve their decision making capabilities in a realistic but risk-free market setting, before trying them out in a real business environment.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Marketing Strategy Modelling (B-KUL-D2R16a)
Explanation
Determination of final grade
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20. The final grade is a weighted score and consists of a weighted average of two separate grades:
- the score on the written examination (50% of the final grade) - Block Theory
- the score on the Markstrat team project (50% of the final grade) – Block Practice
- Team performance (20%) – based on the results of the simulation results
- Marketing Strategy report (15%)
- Final report (15%)
- Peer assessment- the score on the Markstrat team project may differ from the team average (+ / - 10 %), or a stronger correction (<-10%) in case of ‘free-riding’ issues (indicated by the peer assessment)
If the set deadlines of the Markstrat team project (determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo) was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
Information about retaking exams
Second exam opportunity
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity.
Due to the nature of the Markstrat team project, the grade attained at the first examination opportunity will be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
The final grade is a weighted score and consists of a weighted average of two separate grades:
the score on the written examination (50% of the final grade) - Block Theory
the score on the Markstrat team project (50% of the final grade) – grade at the first examination opportunity - Block Practice
ECTS Project Management and Scheduling (B-KUL-D0R18A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student can:
• fully understand fundamental scheduling and sequencing problems that arise in resource-constrained project scheduling environments within the manufacturing and service industry;
• apply state-of-the-art methodologies for effectively and efficiently planning projects subject to both precedence and resource constraints;
• manage and control a project.
Previous knowledge
Students should be familiar with the basic mathematical programming models and solution techniques as offered in a bachelor-level operations research course.
Course participants should realize that in dealing with the various scheduling and sequencing problems discussed in the course, we will (have to) rely on analytic techniques. We will use mathematical programming models (mostly integer linear programming) of the type discussed in a basic bachelor course in operations research, and rely on both exact solution procedures (branch-and-bound) and heuristic problem solving (priority-based simple heuristics, heuristic search (tabu search, genetic algorithms, …).
We will illustrate the various scheduling and sequencing problems using in-house developed computer software (RESCON for project scheduling) as well as academic and commercially available scheduling software (Suretrak and MSProject).
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Productie en logistiek) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 120 ects.
- Master of Statistics and Data Science (on campus) (Leuven) (Statistics and Data Science for Business) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 6: Production and Logistics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Productie en logistiek) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Production and Logistics) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Production and Logistics) 127 ects.
- Master of Mobility and Supply Chain Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) (Major Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Project Management and Scheduling (B-KUL-D0R18a)
Content
This course is about project management and scheduling. Planning and scheduling are decision-making processes that occur in many manufacturing and service industries. In this course we study planning and scheduling processes mainly from a project viewpoint, but the principles and methodologies of this project scheduling are also applicable in a production environment.
The course consists of two parts. Part I (Project scheduling) deals with project systems, which involve activities to be performed in a production or service environment, by following given precedence relationships with or without additional resource constraints. The planning phase of a project involves a listing of tasks or jobs that must be performed to bring about the project’s completion. Gross requirements for material, equipment, and manpower are also determined in this phase, and estimates of durations and costs for the various jobs are made. We will study the use of activity-on-the-arc and activity-on-the-node networks to represent the projects to be planned. Scheduling is the laying out of the actual jobs of the project in the time order in which they have to be performed. Manpower and material requirements needed at each stage of production are calculated along with the expected completion time of each of the jobs. Control begins with reviewing the difference between the schedule and actual performance once the project has begun. The analysis and correction of this difference forms the basic aspects of control.
The main topics discussed in Part I can be listed as follows: project representation using activity networks, time analysis (estimating the project duration in a deterministic and probabilistic setting), resource management, i.e. resource leveling (leveling the use of the resources over time subject to a project deadline) and resource-constrained-project scheduling (scheduling the activities subject to the various precedence and resource constraints in order to minimize the project duration), cash flow management (scheduling a project in order to maximize its net present value), time/cost trade-off problems (taking corrective actions in order to bring a project back to plan), project scheduling under risk and proactive/reactive project scheduling (protecting the baseline schedule to anticipate possible schedule disruptions that may occur during project execution, and the deployment of reactive procedures to repair the schedule when it breaks despite the built-in protection).
Part II (Project management) deals with the generally recognized good practices of project management. In this part, the application of knowledge, skills, tools and techniques to project activities in order to meet the project requirements will be discussed and this along the five important phases in a project, namely initiating the project, planning the project, executing the project, monitoring and controlling the project, and closing the project.
Course material
Both the course notes and the Powerpoint slides used in class can be downloaded as pdf from Toledo. Assignments and master solutions will be provided on Toledo.
Format: more information
Students prepare for the class discussion by working through the course notes. Students prepare the assignments and submit them by the given due date. Master solutions for the assignments and feedback will be given during the class discussions.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Project Management and Scheduling (B-KUL-D2R18a)
Explanation
Evaluation characteristics:
The evaluation consists of:
• Home assignments
• A final exam
Students need to bring their own calculator to the exam.
* Term of deliverance and deadline for the home assignments will be determined by the lecturer (titularis) and communicated via Toledo.
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer(s) (titularis), as announced via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is computed and expressed as a whole number on a scale of 20.
* The end result is a weighted number that is determined as follows:
• The home assignments (in teams of 3 students) count for 20%
• The final exam counts for 80%.
* Students who do not participate in the final exam get an NA ("not available") for the final evaluation of the course.
* Students who do not take part in a given home assignment, get a 0 for that assignment.
* If the determined deadline of a particular home assignment was not respected, the final grade for that assignment will be 0, unless the students were given an extended deadline by the lecturer (only for appropriate reasons).
Second examination opportunity:
*For students who took part in the exam at the first examination opportunity and need to retake the exam at the second examination opportunity, the features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity. For these students the home assignments are no longer a part of the evaluation. The final grade is only determined by the final exam.
*For students who skipped the exam at the first examination opportunity , the evaluation of the home assignments counts for 20% of the final grade and the final exam counts for 80% of the final grade. For these students the determination of the final grade is similar to the determination of the final grade of the first examination opportunity.
Information about retaking exams
See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Seminar Operations Management (B-KUL-D0R20A)
Aims
By the end of this course, students are able to
- Acquire knowledge of operations management in a real company
- Develop a solution for a real practical operations management problem
- Perform a thorough analysis on data
- Apply common sense and the material of the courses in the field of operations management
- Work in team and give a good presentation
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Productie en logistiek) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 6: Production and Logistics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Productie en logistiek) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Production and Logistics) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Production and Logistics) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) 120 ects.
- Master of Management Engineering (Brussels) (Major Production and Logistics) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Seminar Operations Management (B-KUL-D0R20a)
Content
During this seminar practical problems are solved in groups. Each group of five students is responsible for the analysis and presentation of a practical problem. Each year, several companies are approached to provide the students with their practical problems in the field of production and logistics so that the students are given the opportunity to gain practical experience. The solutions are presented to the fellow students and staff of the concerned company. Active participation is required.
Course material
None
Format: more information
Each group of students should make a thorough analysis of the problem and suggest a solution on that basis.This should result in a paper of about 25 pages, which is also presented to the other students and the representatives of the company concerned. Students should be in regular contact with the teacher and the work leader (at least every three weeks) and the contact from the company so they can be responsive.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Seminar Operations Management (B-KUL-D2R20a)
Explanation
Evaluation features
* The submission deadline and deadline for group work are determined by the teacher (s) and announced on Toledo.
Determining the result
* The course is assessed by the teacher(s), as announced via Toledo and the examination schedule. The result is calculated and expressed as a whole number on 20.
* All students in a group receive the same mark for the group work unless there is strong evidence that the student has not participated in the group work to the fullest.
* Attendance at the presentation of a number of group works indicated is mandatory. In case of absence without a prior reported valid reason three points are deducted from the mark for the group work.
* If the specified deadline for submission for the group work is not respected, the final mark for the course is NA (not taken).
Retake
* The evaluation characteristics and / or the determination result of the second examination differs from that of the first examination opportunity.
* At the second examination, the exam consists of an individual mandate in the context of the seminar. The score for the original group score is in no way included in the result for the third examination period.
Information about retaking exams
*See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Economics of Global Innovation (B-KUL-D0R22A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
• Identify the major changes in the international environment of relevance for global leading innovators
• Clarify the analytical background to understand the development of global strategies of multinational firms and the role of innovation
• Apply the theoretical analysis to a case project analyzing corporate internationalization strategies of major global leading firms in selected industries
Previous knowledge
Basic economics and management principles.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: International business, strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: International business, strategie en innovatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Economics of Global Innovation (B-KUL-D0R22a)
Content
The course provides economic analysis for understanding the behavior of firms in a rapidly changing global knowledge-based competitive environment. The focus of the course is on key economic concepts, models and evidence that are essential for understanding global corporate strategies, with a special focus on global innovation strategies.
A first set of lectures will characterize the changing global environment of firms, covering recent trends in globalisation:
• Recent trends in globalisation: changing Trade and FDI patterns, global value chains,
• Recent trends in globalisation: internationalisation of innovation
• Europe innovating and competing in a global environment
A second set of lectures will provide the key economic concepts and models to understand how global integration affects corporate structure & strategy, increases the importance of technology for global market leadership and how firms develop global innovative strategies:
• Impact of global integration on corporate and market structure
• Importance of technology for global market leadership
• Why and how to globalise innovation activities.
• How to capture value from global innovations
Special topics include
• Global open innovation strategies: International R&D cooperation
A third part of the course involves to empirically assess firms’ global innovation strategies in key sectors: the GLS exercise (Global Strategies of Leading Firms). Students analyze a key sector and provide a detailed description and comparative analysis of the global strategies applied by the top leading firms in that sector. The global strategies include their geographic spread of sales, production and R&D activities.
Guest lectures will complement the scheduled lectures.
Course material
Used Course Material
Slides
Background material
Examples
Toledo
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity
Format: more information
Lectures, guest lectures, paper
The first part of the course involves lectures, the slides and background material are provided in advance to the students. The lectures allow for raising questions and discussion. The second part of the course involves students’ work on internationalization strategies of key leading firms in selected sectors (GLS exercise). Instructions are presented in class, students have to submit interim results and get feedback on interim results. Students present the final results of their analysis in class. These presentations are discussed in class. Finally, students submit the final report of their analysis.
Guest lectures complement the scheduled lectures.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Economics of Global Innovation (B-KUL-D2R22a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
Grading will be based on the GLS exercise (presentation and report), as well as on a individual case assignment.
* The paper and presentation should reflect that you understand the industry and that you tried to apply the insights taught in class to your industry analysis.
* After completing the industry analysis, students have to indicate the extent to which other students (peers) have contributed to the final result of the paper and presentation (= peer assessment).
* For the paper the term of deliverance and deadline will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo. The deadline is at the end of the semester and before the examination period.
* Students need to submit preliminary work on the paper during the year. These deadlines are spread across the semester.
* The final presentation date will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo. The presentations will take place before the examination period.
ECTS Political Business Strategy (B-KUL-D0R23A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Systematically analyze a firm’s political- and nonmarket environment.
- Develop strategies to deal with the challenges that arise in the political- and in the nonmarket environment.
- Evaluate whether government policy is economically sound.
- Develop a critical attitude and an ability to formulate research questions and conduct research independently.
- Demonstrate team work and presentation skills.
Previous knowledge
Students are supposed to have prior knowledge of microeconomics and business economics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: International business, strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: International business, strategie en innovatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Political Business Strategy (B-KUL-D0R23a)
Content
I. Introduction
II. Political Analysis
This section studies political decision making. It studies the Condorcet paradox, agenda setting, strategic voting, Arrow’ impossibility theorem, spatial theory, the median voter theorem and electoral systems. It focuses on EU institutions and the legislative process in the European Union. Throughout this section the focus is on the importance of these issues for management.
III. Political Strategy
This section studies firms’ nonmarket strategies. It discusses the four I’s of the nonmarket environment: issues, interests, institutions and information. Based on this analysis it develops a framework for the formulation of nonmarket strategies. Amongst others, it uses the following tools: nonmarket issue agendas, distributive politics spreadsheets, and Wilson’s matrix of political competition. The framework is applied to a number of case studies.
IV. Political Strategy and Economic Efficiency
This section analyzes political decision making and regulation in a number of specific areas and industries. It pays attention to political as well as economic aspects of regulation and legislation. First, it studies a number of specific industries, such as the airline and telecommunications industries. Next, it discusses antitrust problems and two special topics of regulation: product safety and environmental protection.
Course material
Required reading:
- Crombez: Political Business Strategy
- Additional course materials, including the course notes and readings, will be made available at the Ekonomika Kursusdienst.
- Additional course material is distributed via Toledo.
- Recommended reading: Baron, David P., Business and Its Environment. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall.
Toledo:
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity.
Format: more information
The teaching philosophy for this course is partly based on lectures and partly based on active discussion in class. For this purpose, students need to read case studies and other materials prior to class.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Political Business Strategy (B-KUL-D2R23a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
* The evaluation for this course consists of:
- A written paper/project and oral presentation. This need to be done in groups and all group member need to do an equal part of the presentation.
- An in-class multiple choice test
- Class participation and preparation: Students need to read case studies and other material prior to class. These materials will then be discussed during the classes.
*Deadlines will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Determination of grades
*The grades are determined by the lecturer. The result is computed and expressed as a whole number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- Paper/project: 30% of the final grade
- Project presentation: 30% of the final grade
- In-class multiple choice test: 30% of the final grade
- Class participation and preparation: 10% of the final grade
* If the student does not participate in the paper/project, the final grade for the course will be NA (not taken). If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the other partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be 0-grades in the calculations of the final grade for the course.
*If one of the set deadlines is not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline prior to the expiration of the original deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Information about retaking exams
Second exam opportunity
*At the second exam opportunity, the final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- Individual paper/project: 30% of the final grade
- Individual project presentation: 30% of the final grade
- Multiple choice test: 30% of the final grade
- Class participation and preparation: 10% of the final grade
*Due to the nature of the class participation and preparation, students cannot retake this part of the evaluation. The results obtained at the first exam opportunity will therefore be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
ECTS Talent Management (B-KUL-D0R26A)
Aims
This course provides students with a research-based understanding of different approaches to talent management in organizations. By contrasting the perspectives and interests of employees and managers, the students are challenged to develop an understanding of talent management both from the paradigm of career self-management, and from the paradigm of organizational career management. In addition to theoretical knowledge, the course also focuses on self-reflection and self-assessment, with the aim of helping the students develop a clearer plan for their own career after graduation.
Previous knowledge
No specific prerequisites
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Personeel en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 11: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Personnel and Organisation) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de psychologie (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting arbeids- en organisatiepsychologie) 120 ects.
- Master in de psychologie (nieuw programma vanaf 2025-2026) (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting arbeids- en organisatiepsychologie) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Talent Management (B-KUL-D0R26a)
Content
The course is organized around the tension between career self-management and organizational career management as two key elements of the strategic talent management approach of any organization.
Theories and research from both perspectives are discussed.
The course addresses the following topic areas:
- What is talent? Etymology, conceptual frameworks, and ‘talent philosophies’
- From definitions to practices: What do companies to under the header of talent management?
- Effects of talent management on organizations and individuals: Research evidence on employee reactions to talent management
- Ethical aspects of talent management: Is it OK to treat employees differently? What about equality?
- Issues of secrecy versus transparency
- Career self-management: How can people discover their strengths and develop a plan for their careers?
- The tension between the interests of organizations and individual employees in developing one’s career: Strategic HR approaches versus strengths-based approaches
- The relationship between organizational career management and career self-management: Is a ‘win-win’ possible?
- The future of work: gig work, digitalization, and the implications for talent management
Course material
Used course materials:
• Course slides, available on Toledo before each class;
• Student’s class notes;
Toledo
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Talent Management (B-KUL-D2R26a)
Explanation
Determination of grades
Features of the evaluation
• The final exam is a take-home exam and consists of open-ended, case-based questions. Sample exam questions will be discussed in the final week of class.
• In addition to the written exam, students will submit a portfolio prior to the end of the semester. Detailed instructions and examples will be discussed in class.
• The deadline for the portfolio assignment will be communicated in class as well as via Toledo.
Determination of final grade
• The final grade will be determined by the main lecturer (course coordinator), as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number (i.e., no decimals) on a scale of 20.
• The final exam will count toward 50% (i.e., 10 out of 20) of the final grade.
• The portfolio assignment will count toward 50% (i.e., 10 out of 20) of the final grade.
• For the portfolio assignment component, students’ grades will be reduced by 1 point per day if the deadline is not met, unless exceptional and grave circumstances led to missing the deadline and an alternative deadline is discussed with the main lecturer (course coordinator) prior to missing the set deadline.
Information about retaking exams
• Students who do not pass the course at the first exam opportunity (i.e., receive a total grade, adding the exam and the portfolio component, of lower than 10 out of 20) and fail both components of the evaluation have to retake the exam (similar features as during the first exam opportunity) and will be required to submit a new or revised portfolio at the second exam opportunity. The detailed assignment and deadline will be communicated via Toledo during the second semester.
• Students who do not pass the course at the first exam opportunity (i.e., receive a total grade, adding the exam and the portfolio component, of lower than 10 out of 20) but only fail the exam component, only need to retake the exam (similar features as during the first exam opportunity). The passing grade for the portfolio assignment obtained at the first exam opportunity will be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
• Students who do not pass the course at the first exam opportunity (i.e., receive a total grade, adding the exam and the portfolio component, of lower than 10 out of 20) but only fail the portfolio component, will be required to submit a new or revised portfolio that needs to be handed in at the second exam opportunity. The detailed assignment and deadline will be communicated via Toledo during the second semester. The passing grade for the exam obtained at the first exam opportunity will be transferred to the second exam opportunity.
• Students who fail the course both at the first and second exam opportunity (i.e., receive a total grade, adding the exam and the portfolio component, of lower than 10 out of 20, for both exam opportunities)—and who retake the course the next academic year—cannot transfer results obtained on either of the components to the following academic year (both components need to be redone).
ECTS Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives (B-KUL-D0R27A)
Aims
After successfully completing this course, the student will be able to:
- discuss the interrelationship between corporate organizations and grand challenges, while acknowledging the two-fold role of corporate entities in both contributing to and addressing these challenges;
- understand and apply critical management theories to analyze the strengths and weaknesses of (responsible) organizational practices;
- understand the significance and varieties of cross-sector partnerships as a strategy to effectively address grand challenges;
- critically analyze the approach of organizations in addressing the grand challenges of inequality and social justice, well-being, and decent work;
- critically discuss and reflect on alternative organizational forms involving participatory governance and hybrid ends; and
- reflect upon the conditions of possibility that are necessary to transform corporate organizations into responsible ones.
Previous knowledge
N.A.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Personeel en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Personeel en organisatie) 120 ects.
- Master in het sociaal werk en sociaal beleid (Leuven e.a.) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 6: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 11: Personnel and Organization) 60 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Major: Innovatie en ondernemerschap) 180 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Personnel and Organisation) 120 ects.
- KICK Academy (Leuven) 18 ects.
- Educatieve master in de economie (Leuven) 90 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part I (B-KUL-D0O87a)
Content
The (im)possibility of responsible organizations: A first, critical reflection on the pillars of CSR
Critical management studies: Critical theories on the role of business organizations in society
Transformation towards responsible organizations: Conditions of possibility
Responsible organizations and their involvement in cross-sector partnerships to address grand challenges
Responsible organizations and their approach to inclusion to address (in)equality and social (in)justice
Course material
PowerPoint presentations and scholarly articles are made available through Toledo
Format: more information
Group assignment - Individual assignment - Presentation
The lecture consists of a mix of lectures, interaction around research articles and the group assignment.
For each of the topics, the instructor will provide lectures based on recent articles and practical materials (case studies, film clips, company documentation). Students are expected to prepare in advance and interact with the lecturer and with each other on critical issues of concern.
One group assignment is given around the lecture topics where the groups focus on a particular theme. Details on the group assignment are communicated during lectures and through Toledo.
Is also included in other courses
D0O87A : Responsible Organizations: Critical Perspectives, Part I
Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives, Part II (B-KUL-D0R27a)
Content
Responsible organizations and HRM: Well-being and work-life balance
Responsible organizations and democracy: Workers participation and deliberative corporate governance
Responsible organizations and purposiveness: Social, hybrid and cooperative organizations
Responsible organizations and their political role: Concluding reflections
Course material
PowerPoint presentations and scholarly articles are made available through Toledo
Format: more information
Group assignment - Individual assignment - Presentation
The lecture consists of a mix of lectures, interaction around scholarly articles and a group assignment.
For each of the topics, the instructor will provide lectures based on recent articles and practical materials (case studies, film clips, company documentation). Students are expected to prepare in advance and interact with the lecturer and with each other on critical issues of concern.
The group assignment is given around the lecture topics where the groups focus on a particular theme. This group assignment is communicated during lectures and through Toledo.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Responsible organizations: Critical perspectives (B-KUL-D2R27a)
Explanation
* The course is assessed by the instructor, as communicated through Toledo and the examination regulations. The result is calculated and expressed with a whole number at 20.
* The final result is determined as follows: Two Group Assignments account for 40% and the Individual Essay accounts for 60% in the final result. Passing the course is only possible when one passes the Individual Essay component. Possibly, peer evaluation will be applied. This will be communicated via Toledo.
* If the student does not participate in one of the partial evaluations, the student will receive NA (not taken) for the entire course unit.
Information about retaking exams
The second examination opportunity involves an individual essay. The results of the group assignments from the first semester still count for 40% of the final result. Passing the course is only possible when one passes the individual essay component. If the student did not participate in the group assignments, there will be an additional individual assignment.
ECTS Global, B2B and Service Marketing (B-KUL-D0R36A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Recognize, clarify and illustrate core concepts of marketing as relevant in the functional domains of global marketing, B2B marketing, and service marketing.
- Justify research designs and methods of relevant academic research in global, B2B and service marketing.
- Explain the findings of relevant academic research in global, B2B and service marketing.
- Reflect critically on managerial practice and on research in global, B2B and service marketing.
- Apply theoretical and empirical contributions of relevant academic research in global, B2B and service marketing to real world cases.
- Understand how emerging trends (e.g., digitization, sustainability) affect global, B2B and service marketing.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course the student should know the basic concepts of marketing, as illustrated in for example an introductory course of marketing. In addition, the student should have basic knowledge of multivariate research methods and statistics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: International business) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 5: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 2: International Business) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 8: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing Management) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Global Marketing (B-KUL-D0R36a)
Content
The following topics will be covered in the section “Global Marketing”:
The following topics will be covered in the section “Global Marketing”:
- Basics of global marketing
- Characteristics of international market research
- Characteristics of international marketing strategy
- Characteristics of international marketing-mix activities
- Emerging trends in global marketing
Course material
Slides, academic and press articles as well as relevant book chapters will be provided via Toledo.
Format: more information
The standard lecture is generally accompanied by the following instructional formats and learning activities:
- Interactive discussion of course content
- Guest lectures by experts from industry and research
- Students’ preparation of scientific papers, real world cases and press articles in preparation for the interactive lectures
- In-class polls to monitor the learning progress of students
B2B Marketing (B-KUL-D0S04a)
Content
The following topics will be covered in the section “B2B Marketing”:
- Basics of B2B marketing
- Marketing strategy in a B2B context
- Marketing-mix activities in a B2B context
- Emerging trends in B2B marketing
Course material
Slides, academic and press articles as well as relevant book chapters will be provided via Toledo.
Format: more information
The standard lecture is generally accompanied by the following instructional formats and learning activities:
Interactive discussion of course content
Guest lectures by experts from industry and research
Students’ preparation of scientific papers, real world cases and press articles in preparation for the interactive lectures
In-class polls to monitor the learning progress of students
Service Marketing (B-KUL-D0S05a)
Content
The following topics will be covered in the section “Service Marketing”:
- Basics of service marketing
- Defining and managing service quality
- Marketing strategy in a service context
- Marketing-mix activities: 4 P’s and more
- Emerging trends in service marketing
Course material
Slides, academic and press articles as well as relevant book chapters will be provided via Toledo.
Language of instruction: more information
Sessions will be taught in English.
Format: more information
The standard lecture is generally accompanied by the following instructional formats and learning activities:
Interactive discussion of course content
Guest lectures by experts from industry and research
Students’ preparation of scientific papers, real world cases and press articles in preparation for the interactive lectures
In-class polls to monitor the learning progress of students
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Global, B2B and Service Marketing (B-KUL-D2R36a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
The student will be evaluated on the basis of (1) a group assignment and (2) a written closed book exam with open-ended questions.
The group assignment covers a topic from at least of the three sections Global, B2B & Service Marketing.
The evaluation for the group assignment may include a peer evaluation.
In the exam, the three sections (i.e., Global, B2B & Service Marketing) receive an equal weight, that is, one third of the exam will be devoted to Global Marketing, one third to B2B Marketing and one third to Service Marketing.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and expressed as a number on a scale of 20.
25% of the grade is determined by the group assignment and 75% is determined by the written exam.
If the student does not participate in the group assignment, the student receives NA (not taken) for the entire course.
The grade for the written exam is based on the average of the scores for the three sections (i.e., Global, B2B & Service Marketing). The three parts receive an equal weight.
The written exam is only passed if at least two of the three sections (i.e., Global, B2B & Service Marketing) are passed individually.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades for the second examination opportunity are identical to the fist examination opportunity.
When the student has to redo the group assignment, an alternative individual assignment will be provided.
ECTS Brand Management (B-KUL-D0R42A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
- Understand theories, concepts and methods within brand management.
- Explain how the core concept of brand equity can be conceptualized and measured.
- Understand essential challenges managers face in building and managing strong brands and derive managerial recommendations.
- Understand basic questions of brand portfolio management and derive managerial recommendations.
- Reflect on the relationship between intangible assets (including brands) and the financial value of firms.
- Realize how emerging trends (e.g., digitization, sustainability) affect brand-related decisions.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course the student should know the basic concepts of marketing, as illustrated in for example an introductory course of marketing. In addition, the student should have basic knowledge of multivariate research methods and statistics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing management) 120 ects.
- Master in de communicatiewetenschappen (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting mediapsychologie) 60 ects.
- Master in de communicatiewetenschappen (Leuven) (Afstudeerrichting strategie en organisatie) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 5: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 8: Marketing Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Marketing Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Communication Sciences: Digital Media and Society (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Brand Management (B-KUL-D0R42a)
Content
Brands are one of the most valuable (intangible) firm assets. Thus, they can provide firms with an enduring competitive advantage. Nevertheless, building and managing strong brands is a difficult challenge. How to successfully master this challenge is the central theme of the course Brand Management.
The following themes will be covered:
- The concept of brands (definition, function, strategic consideration)
- The core concept of brand equity (customer-based and financial)
- Building of brand equity
- Management of brands and brand portfolios
- The role of brands within the marketing-finance interface
- Emerging trends in brand management
Course material
Slides, academic and press articles as well as relevant book chapters will be provided via Toledo.
Format: more information
The standard lecture is generally accompanied by the following instructional formats and learning activities:
- Interactive discussion of course content
- Guest lectures by experts from industry and research
- Students’ preparation of scientific papers, real world cases and press articles in preparation for the interactive lectures
- In-class polls to monitor the learning progress of students
.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Brand Management (B-KUL-D2R42a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION
The student will be evaluated on basis of (1) a group assignment and (2) a written closed book exam with open-ended questions. The evaluation for the group assignment may include a peer evaluation.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
25% of the grade is determined by the group assignment and 75% is determined by the written exam.
If the student does not participate in the group assignment, the student receives NA (not taken) for the entire course.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades for the second examination opportunity are identical to the fist examination opportunity.
When the student has to redo the group assignment, an alternative individual assignment will be provided.
ECTS Competitive Analysis and Strategy (B-KUL-D0R43A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student:
1) is able to understand the economic principles underlying industry structure and strategy formulation;
2) has developed skills in analysing the drivers of the competitive environment and in identifying sound corporate strategies;
3) is able to apply theoretical and empirical contributions in academic research to real-world cases and to find solutions to real-world cases in theory, with sound judgement;
4) is able to formulate research questions and conduct research independently;
5) has developed skills in searching for, and making good use of, publicly available information on firms and industries;
6) has further developed team work and presentation skills.
Previous knowledge
Basic knowledge of microeconomics.
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: International business, strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Strategie en innovatie) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: International business, strategie en innovatie) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 1: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 1: Strategy and Innovation) 60 ects.
- Master of Information Management (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: International Business, Strategy and Innovation) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Competitive Analysis and Strategy (B-KUL-D0R43a)
Content
This course explores the overlapping areas of industrial economics and strategic management. It is designed to provide students with an understanding of the economic principles underlying strategy formulation. Based on an analysis of the factors shaping the industry environment, firms assess their positioning relative to their rivals, and formulate strategies in order to achieve a durable competitive advantage. In choosing between strategies, firms have to take into account the possible reactions of rivals to their strategic decisions. The course provides students with the tools to analyse the positioning and performance of firms in different industry environments. These tools mainly rely on economic theories (theories of industrial organization, basic concepts of game theory, transaction cost theory, and the resource based theory of the firm). The course covers various topics in strategy formulation, such as product positioning and differentiation, diversification, vertical integration, pricing, strategic commitments, entry deterrence, and entry into new markets.
Course material
Required reading:
- Besanko, David, David Dranove, Mark Shanley, and Scott Schaefer, 2017, Economics of Strategy, 7th Edition, New York: John Wiley & Sons (ISBN: 978111978761).
- Case Reader available for purchase at the Case Centre
- Additional course material (such as theory and summary slides) is distributed via Toledo.
Toledo:
Toledo is being used for this learning activitity.
Format: more information
The teaching philosophy for this course is partly based on problem based learning methods. Students are encouraged to read through the theory and consult online mini-lectures in advance, independently or in teams. In preparation for class, students are asked to attempt to find answers to theory and case questions using the textbook and case material. The questions point to the most important concepts in theory, and application of these concepts to the cases aims to foster a better understanding of the importance of economic analysis for strategic decision making. A number of student teams will be asked to prepare a short presentation of their answers and to present their views in class. Since students may come up with diverging answers to these questions, this invites discussion and encourages a more critical attitude towards the usefulness and applicability of theory. Teaching methods based on problem based learning principles have been shown to provide students with a better applicable and durable knowledge base. Implementing this method in this course is facilitated by a comprehensive and accessible textbook and is complemented by a number of online lectures and slides, available on Toledo, in which the more complex parts of theory are explained. Teams of students furthermore conduct a strategy project in which they critically analyse the strategy followed by a chosen firm in a particular industry, using the theoretical tools provided in the course, and culminating in a strategy recommendation. The teams deliver a report on their analysis in the last week of the semester.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Competitive Analysis and Strategy (B-KUL-D2R43a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The evaluation consists of:
- In-class participation (hand-ins and presentations, team work)
- A project paper (team work)
- A written, closed-book exam
The written exam is taken in two parts. Half of the exam will be scheduled in the middle of the semester during a scheduled class and the other half is scheduled in the exam period in June.
Deadlines and terms of deliverance will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Determination of final grades
The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
The final course grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- The in-class participation, counting for 20% of the final grade
- The project paper, counting for 20% of the final grade
- The written exam, integrating the scores on the two parts, counting for 60% of the final grade.
If there is a deficit score (<10/20) for the written exam, this exam grade becomes the final grade for the course. Hence, a minimum grade of 10 for the exam is required to pass the course.
Based on peer assessment (team self evaluation), a correction can be made to the grade for the in-class participation and project paper. The correction will correspond to the score a student receives by fellow students in the team for his/her contribution to the team work. The details of the peer evaluation will be communicated via Toledo.
If the student does not participate in the exam scheduled during the exam period, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken). If the student does not participate at the in-class participation, project paper, or the partial exam during the semester, the grades for this/these partial evaluation(s) will be 0 in the determination of the final course grade.
If one of the set deadlines is not respected, the grade for that respective part will be 0 in the determination of the final course grade, unless the student is granted a new deadline by the lecturer. Requests for a new deadline need to be well motivated.
Information about retaking exams
Second examination opportunity
The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
Due to the nature of the in-class participation and the project paper, the grades obtained for these parts at the first exam opportunity will be transferred to the second examination opportunity. In the second exam opportunity, the full written exam (consisting of both parts) has to be retaken.
ECTS Internal Control and Risk Management (B-KUL-D0R51A)
Aims
This course introduces enterprise risk management (ERM, hereafter). This course provides an understanding and application of methods of assessing and managing risk within organizations. In addition, it deals with different stages within the overall risk management process. Besides, it explains the relationship between ERM, strategy and controls. Furthermore, it covers the best practices of ERM (e.g., COSO ERM) and their implementations.
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
- Understand, apply and analyze the issues involved in the risk management process of an enterprise.
- Assess the different risks faced by an organization
- Understand the key concepts related to ERM.
- Understand the role of the internal audit function, senior management, the board of directors and the external auditor in ERM
- Understand the link between ERM and strategy and controls, assess the strategies of enterprises, and apply the enterprise risk management to achieve the strategies.
- Identify novel risks and evaluate risk management in the midst of the crisis (Risk Management and Crisis Management)
- Discuss how an organization might go about its ERM implementation and evaluate the effectiveness of ERM implementation.
- Understand, apply, analyze, and evaluate the ERM frameworks (COSO and ISO).
- Apply the techniques learned to new situations encountered in the working of an institution.
Previous knowledge
Upon the start of the course, the students should have a basic background in Business studies (30 ECTS)
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2024-2025 in de master en/of in het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en auditing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 127 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
- Master in de accountancy en het revisoraat (programma voor studenten gestart in de master in 2024-2025 of later, en voor studenten gestart in de master en/of het schakel- of voorbereidingsprogramma vóór 2024-2025 indien zij hiervoor kiezen) (Leuven) 60 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Internal Control and Risk Management (B-KUL-D0R51a)
Content
The course consists of lectures and case study workshops. The Lectures are used to convey background, critical information, and theories. Besides, the case study workshops are used to discuss case studies. The videos related to the lectures will be recorded during the class and be made available. However, due to cases' copyright, the video related to the case study workshop will not be recorded. It is thus recommended (not mandatory) that you attend the case study workshops. Reading assignments (textbook, articles, and cases) are to be completed prior to classes and are designed to help students participate in meaningful discussion regarding selected topics.
In general, this course will follow the outline listed below.
- Strategy (review) and the link between strategy and risk
- Control (review) and the link between organizational control and risk
- Risk Management concepts and Risk Management Process
- Types of risks that an organization is facing
- ERM and Governance
- The link between ERM, Strategy, and Controls
- ERM frameworks (COSO, ISO)
- ERM tools and techniques
- Implementation of ERM
- Financial industry and bank capital requirements (BASEL regulations)
- Fraud in organizations
- Crisis Management and Novel Risks
Course material
Used Course Material
- Slides
- COSO ERM 2017 and its compendium (via library)
- Extra course material (e.g., scientific articles, guidelines, videos).
- Cases and simulation (need to be purchased by the students)
Recommended Reading (via Library)
- Enterprise Risk Management: From Incentives to Controls (James Lam)
- Implementing Enterprise Risk Management: Case Studies and Best Practices (Fraser, Simkins & Narvaez)
- Implementing Enterprise Risk Management: From Methods to Application (James Lam)
Toledo·
- Toledo, and an online platform (e.g., Blackboard Collaborate) are being used for the learning activities.
Format: more information
Asynchronous online learning - Blended learning
Students are expected to critically and thoroughly study the theory, cases and examples.
During the semester students have to perform the following activities:
- Make three take-home group assignments (case reports, a project paper and/or simulation). Afterward the deadline, the cases will be discussed in case study workshops.
- Present the group assignments in class
- Participate in a scientific activity (e.g. experiment on risk and control)
- Participate in simulation/or risk game
- Participate in group discussions
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Internal Control and Risk Management (B-KUL-D2R51a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
- The evaluation consists of group assignments (case reports, project) and a final exam.
- The final exam is a written closed book on-campus exam with different type of questions (Multiple choice, open- and closed questions).
- The group assignments are executed in groups of 2-4 students. The group assignments can also be done solo.
Determination of final grades
- The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The results are calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
- The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- 50% Final exam
- 50% Project and case reports
- If there is a deficit score (<10/20) for the final exam, the exam grade becomes the final grade for the course. Hence, a minimum grade of 10 (out of 20) for the final exam is required to pass the course.
- If the student does not participate at the exam, the final grade of the course will be NA (not taken) for the whole course. If the student does not participate at the project and/or case reports, the grades for this/these partial evaluation(s) will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
- If one of the set deadlines was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the lecturer grants the student a new deadline. Request for a new deadline need to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Information about retaking exams
Second examination opportunity
- The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades are the same between the first and second examination opportunity. However, no make-up group assignments will be available (except in the grave circumstances).
ECTS Behavioral Economics (B-KUL-D0R80A)
Aims
Upon completion of the course, students should be able to:
- show a broad, systematic knowledge of research in the thriving scientific domain of economic psychology, and newer economic research domains as behavioral economics, neuroeconomics, and experimental economics.
- critically evaluate this research.
- apply resulting insights to managerial problems in marketing or public policy.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course the student should know the basics of economics, marketing and psychology.
Is included in these courses of study
- Doctoral Programme in Business Economics (Leuven)
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Minor: Kwantitatieve marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 7: Quantitative Marketing) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Kwantitatieve marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Quantitative Marketing) 127 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Quantitative Marketing) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Behavioral Economics (B-KUL-D0R80a)
Content
1. Behavioral Economics in a general sense will be studied:
- "How do individuals and families make allocation decisions between saving, investing, and spending?"
- "What are the consequences of consumption on wellfare?"
2. Possible consequences for managerial decisions of bounded rationality, bounded willpower, and bounded self-interest will be studied.
Course material
Used Course Material
*The course material consists of research articles, and will be distributed via Toledo.
Toledo
*Toledo is being used for this learning activitity
Format: more information
The classes will be interactive in nature, with a focus on applying a critical approach on research and managerial problems.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Behavioral Economics (B-KUL-D2R80a)
Explanation
FEATURES OF THE EVALUATION.
*The evaluation of this course will be determined on the basis of a paper and a written, closed book exam with open ended questions.
*Term of deliverance and deadline for the paper will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo
*Sample exam questions are offered via Toledo.
DETERMINATION OF FINAL GRADES
*The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
*The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- the paper is graded and counts for 60% of the final grade,
- the final exam counts for the other 40%.
*If the student does not participate in a partial evaluation (paper or exam), the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
*If the set deadline for the paper was not respected, the grade for that respective part will be a 0-grade in the final grade, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
SECOND EXAMINATION OPPORTUNITY
*The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity, as described above.
*At the second examination opportunity, the paper remains part of the final grade. Therefore, the (adjusted) paper has to be handed in again.
Information about retaking exams
* See 'Explanation' for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (B-KUL-D0R87A)
Aims
This course provides an overview of financial analysis concepts and practices. The main objective of the course is to learn students how to read, analyze, and interpret financial reports and financial accounting data to make informed business and valuation decisions. A first purpose is for students to learn how to analyze financial statements, including a firm’s balance sheet, income statement, cash flow statement, equity statement and disclosure notes. Students learn how to analyze a firm’s profitability, liquidity and solvency position. Next, students will learn how to extract information from financial reports and disclosures on a firm's financial performance, its creditworthiness, its likelihood of bankruptcy and liquidity problems. Students will learn how to interpret and analyze complex but relevant operating items from a firm’s balance sheet and income statement including revenues, R&D, tax items and goodwill. The second purpose of this course is to show students how they can use and transform financial information and accounting inputs in order to value firms through various techniques.
After completing this course, the student should be able:
- to understand the economic interpretation behind the numbers shown in financial statements
- to understand and being able to critically evaluate various valuation techniques
- to understand how business activities (operations, investing, financing) are depicted through stocks and flows in the financial statements
- to analyze financial statements in a detailed and coherent fashion. Specifically, being able to analyze in-depth a firm’s profitability, liquidity and solvency position.
- to infer profitability and growth from the reformulated financial statements
- to convert forecasts into a valuation, using accrual-based accounting valuation models
- to decide on the quality of financial statements
- to interpret new models and to develop a critical scientific attitude towards research in this domain
Previous knowledge
The student should meet the criteria for the program. Students should have a basic knowledge of financial statements, ratios and technical accounting (bookkeeping).
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting en financieel management) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Minor: Accountancy en financieel management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Major 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 4: Accounting and Financial Management) 60 ects.
- Master in de economie, het recht en de bedrijfskunde (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) (Minor: Accounting and Financial Management) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur: bidiplomering UCLouvain (inkomend) (Leuven e.a.) (Opleidingsonderdelen KU Leuven: Major: Accountancy en financieel management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) (Courses KU Leuven: Major: Accounting and Financial Management) 127 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (B-KUL-D0R87a)
Content
- Understanding the firm’s key financial statements: balance sheet, income statement, cash flow statement, equity statement and statement of comprehensive income
- Detailed analysis of profitability
- Advanced credit risk analysis, bankruptcy prediction and financial distress analysis
- Advanced liquidity analysis
- In-depth analysis of revenues and operating expenses
- In-depth analysis of operating assets and liabilities
- Reformulation of the financial statements for valuation purposes
- Forecasting financial statements and estimating valuation inputs
- Understanding and applying cash-flow based valuation models, residual income valuation models, and executing valuation multiples
- Accounting earnings versus economic earnings
- Analysis of the quality of financial statements
- Understanding fraud accounting
Course material
Textbook:
- Easton, McAnally, Sommers, Zhang
- Title: Financial Statement Analysis and Valuation
- Publisher: Cambridge Business Publishers
- Version: Fifth edition (2018)
Academic papers (made available on Blackboard).
Toledo/Blackboard with papers, journal articles, annual reports, financial disclosures and exercises
Format: more information
* Students have to prepare some of the lectures by reading and summarizing research papers. These papers will be discussed during the lectures together with exercises and case studies.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (B-KUL-D2R87a)
Explanation
Features of the evaluation
The final exam is a written, closed book exam. Students can use a calculator and a formulary (students have to bring their own copy to the exam).
Determination of final grades
* The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated in class and via Toledo, and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
* The final exam accounts for 100 % of the final grade.
Information about retaking exams
Second examination opportunity
* The features of the evaluation and determination of grades are similar to those of the first examination opportunity.
ECTS Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (B-KUL-D0S92A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, the student is able to:
• evaluate the alignment of the operation strategy with other business strategies;
• develop and evaluate benchmarking models using data envelopment analysis;
• formulate and apply models for optimal capacity sizing and investment decisions;
• formulate and apply models for optimal timing of capacity investment;
• design optimal revenue management strategies (e.g. using price discrimination, overbooking and yield management tactics);
• evaluate different alternatives for capacity flexibility from the perspective of the inherent risk;
• analyse the processes of improvement and innovation and their role in operations strategy.
Previous knowledge
At the beginning of this course, students have to be familiar with:
- Basic concepts of operational management/supply chain management as illustrated, for example, in the preliminary course D0H26A Productie & Logistiek Management (Production and Logistics Management).
- Basic queueing models (M/M/1, M/M/m, G/G/1, G/G/m) as discussed, for example, in the courses D0H28 Operationeel Onderzoek (Operations Research) and D0H26A Productie & Logistiek Management (Production and Logistics Management).
- Basic principles of statistics (see, for example, course D0H46A Kansrekenen en beschrijvende statistiek (Probability theory and descriptive statistics)).
During the course, support and materials for self-study of all the mathematical and statistical concepts will be provided.
Identical courses
D0S34A: Operations strategie
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Minor: Productie en logistiek) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) (Minor 6: Production and Logistics) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (incoming) (Leuven et al) 126 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering: Double Degree UCLouvain (outgoing) (Leuven et al) 127 ects.
- Master of Mobility and Supply Chain Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica: bidiplomering UNamur (inkomend) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering: Double Degree UNamur (incoming) (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Economics and Business (Leuven)
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (B-KUL-D0S92a)
Content
The course consists of the following topics:
I. Concepts and framework for operations strategy
II. Competitive cost advantage analysis + Data Envelopment Analysis
III. Capacity sizing and investment
IV. Capacity timing and location
V. Revenue management
VI. Capacity flexibility and operational hedging
VII. Improvement and innovation
Course material
Used Course Material
All course material (slides, exercises, weblectures, journal articles,...) is distributed via Toledo.
Additional (non-obligatory) material
• Jan A. Van Mieghem, 2008, Operations strategy: principles and practice, Dynamic Ideas, available at Ekonomika Cursusdienst.
Toledo
* Toledo is being used for this learning activity.
Format: more information
The focus during the course sessions is on explaining the learning content. Students are expected to critically and thoroughly study the methods and models presented during the lectures.
During the semester, cases need to be solved in teams of approximately 4 students (students are free to choose their teammates). Each case is afterwards discussed in class. Cases are graded (see "Evaluation").
Additional self-study material (exercises, journal articles) is distributed through Toledo.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Operations Strategy in Manufacturing and Services (B-KUL-D2S92a)
Explanation
Evaluation characteristics:
*The written exam is closed book. Students are allowed to bring a single handwritten double-sided A4 formula sheet to the exam. Students need to bring their own calculator to the exam.
* During the semester, assignments need to be solved (in teams). Feedback for each assignment is communicated directly via Toledo. Note that the cases NEED to be solved in team, during the course of the semester. Requests to solve cases individually (either during the semester or after the end of the course) will be denied. These team assignments include peer assessment.
*The deadline of each case will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Determination of final grades
*The grades are determined by the lecturer as communicated via Toledo and stated in the examination schedule. The result is calculated and communicated as a number on a scale of 20.
* Multiple-choice questions are graded using a correction for guessing.
*The final grade is a weighted score that is determined as follows:
- If a student obtains a grade of less than 10/20 in the final exam, the final grade of that student is their score in the final exam.
- If a student obtains a grade equal or higher than 10/20 in the final exam, the final grade of that student is the maximum between their score in the final exam and a weighted combination of the score in the exam (80%) and the average score in their assignments (20%).
*Based on peer assessment (team self evaluation) a correction can be made to the grade for the team assignments, depending on how the peers evaluated the student's contribution to the team work.
* If the set deadline of a particular assignment was not respected, the grade for that respective assignment will be a 0-grade in the weighted score, unless the students asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated beforehand.
* If the student did not participate in a given assignment, the grade for that respective assignment will be a 0-grade in the weighted score.
* If the student did not participate in the final exam, the final score for the course is NA ("not attended").
Second examination opportunity
*There is no retake for the team assignments. Due to the nature of the (team) assignments, the grade attained at the first examination opportunity (including peer assessment) will be transferred to the second examination opportunity.
Information about retaking exams
* See ‘Explanation’ for further information regarding the second examination opportunity.
ECTS Business English III (B-KUL-D0T37A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, students
- have advanced oral and written communication skills
- are able to efficiently conduct meetings and job interviews in English
- can correctly draft business texts in English
To meet these objectives, class size is limited. Participants have to register for the course on Toledo prior to the start of classes.
Previous knowledge
Students are expected to have completed the following courses or equivalent level courses:
- D0T05A Engels I: Algemeen Economisch Engels or D0W20A Engels I: Algemeen Economisch Engels
- D0T16A Engels II: Communicatie in het Bedrijfsleven or D0W34A Engels II
or
- S0B10B Academisch Engels voor communicatiewetenschappen
Students who did not take these courses may only select Business English III if they have an advanced level of English as demonstrated through an internationally recognised test: IELTS band 7, TOEFL ibt 100, a CPE or CAE.
Identical courses
D0T78A: Business English III
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Bachelor in de communicatiewetenschappen (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2022-2023) (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major 2: Talen) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 1: Keuzetraject studenten campus Brussel) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 2: Talen) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Major: Talen) 180 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Bachelor in de communicatiewetenschappen (programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) (Minor taal en communicatie) 180 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Business English III (B-KUL-D0T37a)
Content
Oral interaction
Conducting job interviews and meetings in a business context; practising business vocabulary and collocations specific to job interviews and meetings, with a focus on appropriate language and style; improving pronunciation.
Writing skills
Writing business texts: writing preparatory documents for a meeting (email, agenda), minutes, writing a job application letter or email and a CV.
Reading skills
Processing authentic background information in preparation for class exercises.
Explicit language study
Acquiring specialised business vocabulary and collocations; acquiring register-specific language of job interviews and meetings; correcting frequent errors in written and spoken language; practising and repeating specific grammatical structures.
Course material
Books
- Course book: Business English III (available via student union Ekonomika)
Toledo
- Background information and class, assignment and test guidelines
- Business English Online
Format: more information
The interactive and participatory nature of the course requires active participation in oral and written activities. For these activities, students work alone or in groups.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Business English III (B-KUL-D2T37a)
Explanation
The evaluation consists of
1. Tasks/tests with regard to oral interaction
- Organising and participating in two meetings
- Job interview
2. Tasks with regard to writing skills
- Meeting-related texts
- Covering letter or email and CV
3. Grammar and meetings language test
4. Participation in class: attendance is mandatory, and will be evaluated on a pass/fail basis
Deadlines will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Calculation of exam scores
The grades are determined by the lecturer, in line with the examination regulations and as communicated via Toledo.
The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- 50% on tasks/tests with regard to oral interaction
- 35% on tasks with regard to writing skills
- 15% on the grammar and meetings language test
Attendance: If the student misses more than 2 classes, the final grade of the course will be NA (not attended) for the whole course. Absences due to illness or other grave circumstances will not count towards this limit, provided that proper documentation is submitted.
For multiple-choice questions, no correction for incorrect answers is applied, but vocabulary and grammar questions usually contain more items than the total number of points to be earned (e.g. 6 items for 4 points, so 2 mistakes would lead to 2 out of 4 points).
The student will only be entitled to a catch-up test/task if official documentation (e.g. doctor's note) is provided and if they have promptly informed the instructor.
If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
If the set deadline was not respected, the grade for that task will be reduced by 1 point per day late, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity.
- Because of the nature of group tasks (organising and participating in two meetings), these tasks cannot be taken again and class results are transferred to the August resit, accounting for 30% of the final result.
- Students participate in a job interview, accounting for 20% of the final result.
- Students resubmit individual writing tasks, which can be improved versions of their previously submitted tasks, accounting for 35% of the final result. If writing tasks were not submitted previously, new and equivalent writing assignments will be set by the tutor.
- Students take a grammar and meeting language test, accounting for 15% of the final result.
ECTS Business English III (B-KUL-D0T78A)
Aims
Upon completion of this course, students
- have advanced oral and written communication skills
- are able to efficiently conduct meetings and job interviews in English
- can correctly draft business texts in English
To meet these objectives, class size is limited. Participants have to register for the course on Toledo prior to the start of classes.
Previous knowledge
Students are expected to have completed the following courses or equivalent level courses:
- D0T05A Engels I: Algemeen Economisch Engels or D0W20A Engels I: Algemeen Economisch Engels
- D0T16A Engels II: Communicatie in het Bedrijfsleven or D0W34A Engels II
or
- S0B10B Academisch Engels voor communicatiewetenschappen
Students who did not take these courses may only select Business English III if they have an advanced level of English as demonstrated through an internationally recognised test: IELTS band 7, TOEFL ibt 100, a CPE or CAE.
Identical courses
D0T37A: Business English III
Is included in these courses of study
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Bachelor in de communicatiewetenschappen (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2022-2023) (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) (Major 2: Talen) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 1: Keuzetraject studenten campus Brussel) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur (Leuven) (Major 2: Talen) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Bachelor handelsingenieur in de beleidsinformatica (Leuven) (Major: Talen) 180 ects.
- Master of Business Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master of Business and Information Systems Engineering (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Bachelor in de communicatiewetenschappen (programma voor studenten gestart in 2022-2023 of later) (Leuven) (Minor taal en communicatie) 180 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
Business English III (B-KUL-D0T78a)
Content
Oral interaction
Conducting job interviews and meetings in a business context; practising business vocabulary and collocations specific to job interviews and meetings, with a focus on appropriate language and style; improving pronunciation.
Writing skills
Writing business texts: writing preparatory documents for a meeting (email, agenda), minutes, writing a job application letter or email and a CV.
Reading skills
Processing authentic background information in preparation for class exercises.
Explicit language study
Acquiring specialised business vocabulary and collocations; acquiring register-specific language of job interviews and meetings; correcting frequent errors in written and spoken language; practising and repeating specific grammatical structures.
Course material
Books
- Course book: Business English III (available via student union Ekonomika)
Toledo
- Background information and class, assignment and test guidelines
- Business English Online
Format: more information
The interactive and participatory nature of the course requires active participation in oral and written activities. For these activities, students work alone or in groups.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: Business English III (B-KUL-D2T78a)
Explanation
The evaluation consists of
1. Tasks/tests with regard to oral interaction
- Organising and participating in two meetings
- Job interview
2. Tasks with regard to writing skills
- Meeting-related texts
- Covering letter or email and CV
3. Grammar and meetings language test
4. Participation in class: attendance is mandatory, and will be evaluated on a pass/fail basis
Deadlines will be determined by the lecturer and communicated via Toledo.
Calculation of exam scores
The grades are determined by the lecturer, in line with the examination regulations and as communicated via Toledo.
The result is calculated and communicated as a whole number on a scale of 20.
The final grade is a weighted score and consists of:
- 50% on tasks/tests with regard to oral interaction
- 35% on tasks with regard to writing skills
- 15% on the grammar and meetings language test
Attendance: If the student misses more than 2 classes, the final grade of the course will be NA (not attended) for the whole course. Absences due to illness or other grave circumstances will not count towards this limit, provided that proper documentation is submitted.
For multiple-choice questions, no correction for incorrect answers is applied, but vocabulary and grammar questions usually contain more items than the total number of points to be earned (e.g. 6 items for 4 points, so 2 mistakes would lead to 2 out of 4 points).
The student will only be entitled to a catch-up test/task if official documentation (e.g. doctor's note) is provided and if they have promptly informed the instructor.
If the student does not participate in one (or more) of the partial evaluations, the grades for these partial evaluations will be a 0-grade within the calculations of the final grade.
If the set deadline was not respected, the grade for that task will be reduced by 1 point per day late, unless the student asked the lecturer to arrange a new deadline. This request needs to be motivated by grave circumstances.
Information about retaking exams
The features of the evaluation and/or the determination of grades differ between the first and second examination opportunity.
- Because of the nature of group tasks (organising and participating in two meetings), these tasks cannot be taken again and class results are transferred to the August resit, accounting for 30% of the final result.
- Students participate in a job interview, accounting for 20% of the final result.
- Students resubmit individual writing tasks, which can be improved versions of their previously submitted tasks, accounting for 35% of the final result. If writing tasks were not submitted previously, new and equivalent writing assignments will be set by the tutor.
- Students take a grammar and meeting language test, accounting for 15% of the final result.
ECTS The Science of Human Movement (B-KUL-L00G8A)
Aims
The objective of this course is to give students a basic understanding into the science of the human movement. . To that aim, the student will receive an introduction in various subdomains that are represented in the Department of Movement Sciences (e.g., motor learning, exercise physiology, biomechanics, epidemiology of physical activity , sport and exercise psychology, sport and exercise policy, …)
At the end of this course the student will be able to:
- situate the scientific study of physical activity and human movement in a historical and conceptual framework
- describe some sub-disciplines of the science of human movement
Is included in these courses of study
- Bachelor in de psychologie (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2023-2024) (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Master in de toegepaste economische wetenschappen (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Master of Business Economics (Leuven) 60 ects.
- Courses for Exchange Students Faculty of Movement and Rehabilitation Sciences (Leuven)
- Bachelor in het milieu- en preventiemanagement (programma voor studenten gestart vóór 2023-2024) (Brussel) 180 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Children) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Internal Disorders) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Mental Health Care) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Musculoskeletal Disorders: Option Manual Therapy) 120 ects.
- Master of Rehabilitation Sciences and Physiotherapy (Leuven) (Specialisation: Neurological Disorders) 120 ects.
- Master in de farmaceutische zorg (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Master in de geneesmiddelenontwikkeling (Leuven) 120 ects.
- Bachelor in de biomedische wetenschappen (Leuven) 180 ects.
- Master in de logopedische en audiologische wetenschappen (Leuven) 120 ects.
Onderwijsleeractiviteiten
The Science of Human Movement (B-KUL-L00G8a)
Content
During the lectures, several professors will approach the science of human movement from their own experience, each from a different perspective. Both a biological and a behavioural approach will be addressed.
The following topics can be addressed:
- Aspects related to the (genetic) epidemiology of physical activity and physical fitness
- Risk stratification of physical activity, the relationship between physical activity, physical fitness and mortality / morbidity
- The moving man from a historical, sociological and socio-cultural perspective
- The moving man in a biomechanical perspective
- The moving man in a physiological perspective
- The moving man in a kinantropometric perspective
- The moving man in a pedagogical and psychological perspective
- Basic principles of training and prevention of injuries
- Motor learning and motor control
- ...
Course material
Presentations, articles and literature
Format: more information
Several professors will each explain a facet of the science of human movement.
Evaluatieactiviteiten
Evaluation: The Science of Human Movement (B-KUL-L20G8a)
Explanation
The lectures will be assessed by means of a written exam, closed book.
The student is expected to be aware of the education and examination regulations as well as of the faculty additions.